Allen-Bradley PowerFlex 700S Phase I Control AC Drive Reference Manual

www.abpowerflex.com

Adjustable

Frequency AC Drive

Phase I Control

Reference Manual

Important User Information

Solid state equipment has operational characteristics differing from those of electromechanical equipment. “Safety Guidelines for the Application,

Installation and Maintenance of Solid State Controls” (Publication SGI-1.1

available from your local Rockwell Automation Sales Office or online at

http://www.ab.com/manuals/gi) describes some important differences

between solid state equipment and hard-wired electromechanical devices.

Because of this difference, and also because of the wide variety of uses for solid state equipment, all persons responsible for applying this equipment must satisfy themselves that each intended application of this equipment is acceptable.

In no event will the Rockwell Automation be responsible or liable for indirect or consequential damages resulting from the use or application of this equipment.

The examples and diagrams in this manual are included solely for illustrative purposes. Because of the many variables and requirements associated with any particular installation, the Rockwell Automation cannot assume responsibility or liability for actual use based on the examples and diagrams.

No patent liability is assumed by Rockwell Automation with respect to use of information, circuits, equipment, or software described in this manual.

Reproduction of the contents of this manual, in whole or in part, without written permission of the Rockwell Automation is prohibited.

Throughout this manual we use notes to make you aware of safety considerations.

!

ATTENTION: Identifies information about practices or

circumstances that can lead to personal injury or death, property damage, or economic loss.

Attentions help you:

• identify a hazard

• avoid the hazard

• recognize the consequences

Important: Identifies information that is especially important for successful

application and understanding of the product.

Shock Hazard labels may be located on or inside the drive to

alert people that dangerous voltage may be present.

DriveExplorer, DriveTools32, and SCANport are trademarks of Rockwell Automation.

PLC is a registered trademark of Rockwell Automation.

ControlNet is a trademark of ControlNet International, Ltd.

DeviceNet is a trademark of the Open DeviceNet Vendor Association.

COLOR-KEYED is a registered trademark of Thomas & Betts Corporation.

Summary of Changes

This information summarizes the changes made to this manual since the last release.

Manual Updates

Change

Updated specifications and dimensions

“Alarms” section updated

Added “Copy Cat” section

“Digital Inputs” section updated

“Direction Control and Bipolar Reference” section updated

Added “Drive Overload Temperature (Frame 9 Only)” section

Updated the Efficiency” section

Updated the “Faults” section

New “Flying Start” section

Updated drive ratings tables in the “Fuses and Circuit Brakers” section

Updated the “HIM Operations” section

Added compatible PMM tables to the “Permanent Magnet Motors” section

Updated the “Position Loop - Follower (Electronic Gearing)” section

Added the “Position Loop - In Position Detect” section

Updated the “Position Loop - Point to Point” section

Added the “Position Loop - Registration” section

Updated the “Power Loss/Ride Through” section

Added the “Reflected Wave” section

Updated the “Speed/Position Feedback” section

Updated the “Speed PI Regulator” section

Updated the “Speed/Torque Selection” section

Updated the “User Functions” section

2-78

2-81

2-88

2-102

2-119

2-128

2-149

2-38

2-45

2-48

2-57

2-68

2-70

2-74

2-75

See Page...

1-1

2-1

2-18

2-26

2-31

2-35

2-36

soc-2

Notes:

Table of Contents

Important User Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2

Summary of

Changes

Manual Updates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . i-1

Chapter 1

Chapter 2

Specifications & Dimensions

PowerFlex 700S Specifications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1

Input/Output Ratings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5

Input Voltage Range/Tolerance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6

Heat Dissipation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6

Mounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7

Derating Guidelines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8

Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11

Detailed Drive Operation

Accel Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1

Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1

Analog Inputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2

Analog Outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3

Auto/Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4

Autotune . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4

Auxiliary Power Supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7

Bus Regulation/Braking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7

Cable, Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11

Cable, Motor Lengths . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11

Cable, Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11

Cable Trays and Conduit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11

Carrier (PWM) Frequency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11

Common Bus Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12

Communications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12

ControlNet (20-COMM-C) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13

Copy Cat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-18

Current Limit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-19

Datalinks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-19

Decel Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-21

DeviceNet (20-COMM-D) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-21

Digital Inputs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-26

Digital Outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-29

Direction Control and Bipolar Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-31

Drive Peripheral Interface (DPI) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-31

DriveLogix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-33

Drive Overload . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-34

Drive Over Temperature

(Frame 9 Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-35

Droop. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-35

Dynamic Braking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-36

Efficiency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-36

Electronic Gearing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-36

CE Conformity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-36

Faults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-38

ii

Filters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-38

Flying Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-45

Friction Compensation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-47

Fuses and Circuit Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-48

Grounding, General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-57

HIM Memory. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-57

HIM Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-57

Inertia Adaptation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-58

Inertia Compensation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-59

Input Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-59

Input Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-60

Input Power Conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-60

Jog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-60

Links . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-60

Masks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-62

Motor Control Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-62

Motor Nameplate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-62

Motor Overload . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-63

Motor Start/Stop Precautions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-64

Mounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-64

Output Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-64

Output Display. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-65

Overspeed Limit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-66

Owners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-66

Permanent Magnet Motors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-68

PET . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-69

Position Loop - Follower (Electronic Gearing) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-70

Position Loop - In Position Detect. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-74

Position Loop - Point to Point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-75

Position Loop - Registration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-78

Position Loop - Position Watch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-80

Power Loss/Ride Through . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-81

Preset Speeds . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-86

Process PI Loop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-86

Reflected Wave . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-88

Remote I/O Adapter (20-COMM-R) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-90

RFI Filter Grounding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-101

S-Curve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-101

Speed Control, Speed Mode, Speed Regulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-101

Speed/Position Feedback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-102

Speed Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-113

Speed PI Regulator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-119

Speed/Torque Select . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-128

Start Inhibits. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-132

Start/Stop Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-132

Start-Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-135

Stop Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-135

SynchLink . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-135

Sync Generator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-146

Test Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-147

Thermal Regulator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-147

Index

iii

Torque Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-147

Unbalanced or Ungrounded Distribution Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-148

User Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-149

Voltage Class . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-152

Watts Loss . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-153

iv

Chapter

1

Specifications & Dimensions

PowerFlex 700S

Specifications

Category

Protection

Agency

Certification

Specification

AC Input Overvoltage Trip:

Bus Overvoltage Trip:

Bus Undervoltage Trip:

Nominal Bus Voltage:

Heat Sink Thermistor:

Drive Overcurrent Trip

Software Current Limit:

Hardware Current Limit:

Instantaneous Current Limit:

Frames 1-6 Frames 9 & up

200-208V

Drive

240V

Drive

380/400V

Drive

480V

Drive

600V

Drive

690V

Drive

380/400V

Drive

480V

Drive 500V Drive

600V

Drive

690V

Drive

247VAC 285VAC 475VAC 570VAC 690VAC 863VAC 475VAC 570V AC 611V AC 690VAC 863VAC

350VDC 405VDC 675VDC 810VDC 1013VDC 1164VDC 675VDC 810VDC 810VDC 1013VDC 1164VDC

Adjustable Adjustable

281VDC 324VDC 540VDC 648VDC 810VDC 931VDC 540VDC

Monitored by microprocessor overtemp trip

Calculated value, 105% of motor rated to 200% of drive rated

105% of 3 sec. rating (158%-210%)

143% of 3 sec rating (215%-287%)

Line Transients: Up to 6000 volts peak per IEEE C62.41-1991

Control Logic Noise Immunity: Showering arc transients up to 1500V peak

Power Ride-Thru: 15 milliseconds at full load

648VDC

Calculated value, 105% of motor rated to 200% of drive rated

360% of rated Heavy Duty current (typical)

— up to 6000 volts peak per IEEE C62.41-1991

Showering arc transients up to 1500V peak

15 milliseconds at full load

645VDC 810VDC

Monitored by microprocessor overtemp trip

931VDC

Logic Control Ride-Thru

Ground Fault Trip:

Short Circuit Trip:

0.25 sec., drive not running

Phase-to-ground on drive output

0.25 seconds, drive not running

Phase-to-ground on drive output

Phase-to-phase on drive output

The drive is designed to meet applicable requirements of the following codes/standards:

IEC 61800-2 Adjustable speed electrical power drive systems -

General requirements

IEC 61800-5-1 Adjustable speed electrical power drive systems

- Safety requirements

NFPA 70 – US National Electric Code

NEMA 250 – Enclosures for Electrical Equipment

Phase-to-phase on drive output

The drive is designed to meet applicable requirements of the following codes/standards:

IEC 61800-2 Adjustable speed electrical power drive systems -

General requirements

IEC 61800-5-1 Adjustable speed electrical power drive systems

- Safety requirements

NFPA 70 - US National Electrical Code

UL and cUL Listed to UL508C and CAN/CSA - 22.2 No. 14-95 UL and cUL Listed to UL508C and CAN/CSA - 22.2 No. 14-95

C

UL

US

.

.

TUV

Rheinland

Product Safety

E

W

C

Production inspected

EN 50178

Bauart geprüft

Functional

.

.

TUV

Rheinland

Safety

Type approved

Marked for all applicable European Directives

EMC Directive (89/336/EEC)

Emissions

EN 61800-3 Adjustable Speed electrical power drive systems Part 3

Immunity

EN 61800-3 Second Environment, Restricted Distribution

Low Voltage Directive (73/23/EEC)

EN 50178 Electronic Equipment for use in Power

Installations

Marked for all applicable European Directives

EMC Directive (89/336/EEC)

Emissions

EN 61800-3 Adjustable Speed electrical power drive systems Part 3

Low Voltage Directive (73/23/EEC)

EN 50178 Electronic Equipment for use in Power

Installations

TUV Rheinland (applies to frames 1 - 6, 200/400V, and frames 5

& 6, 690V only)

TUV Functional Safety Report only for frames 1 - 4, 600V (no FS mark on the label)

TUV functional safety report only (no FS mark on the label)

1-2

Specifications & Dimensions

Category Specification

Environment Altitude:

Surrounding Air Temperature without Derating:

Open Type:

Electrical

IP20:

NEMA Type 1:

IP56, NEMA Type 4X:

Frames 1-6

1000 m (3300 ft.) max. without derating

0 to 50° C (32 to 122° F)

0 to 50° C (32 to 122° F)

0 to 40° C (32 to 104 ° F)

0 to 40 ° C (32 to 104 ° F)

Note: Frames 9 & 10 are rated 0 to 40 ° C (32 to 104 ° F) surrounding air.

-40 to 70° C (-40 to 158° F)

Frames 9 & up

1000 m (3300 ft) max. without derating

Based on drive rating, refer to Drive Frame chapters

Storage Temperature (all const.):

Relative Humidity:

Shock:

Vibration:

Atmosphere

5 to 95% non-condensing

10G peak for 11 ms duration (+/- 1.0 ms)

0.152 mm (0.006 in.) displacement, 1G peak, 5.5 Hz

—

–40 to 70 degrees C (–40 to 158 degrees F)

5 to 95% non-condensing

15G peak for 11ms duration (

±1.0 ms)

2 mm (0.0787 in.) displacement, 1G peak

EN50178 / EN60068-2-6

Important: Drive must not be installed in an area where the ambient atmosphere contains volatile or corrosive gas, vapors or dust. If the drive is not going to be installed for a period of time, it must be stored in an area where it will not be exposed to a corrosive atmosphere.

AC Input

Voltage Tolerance:

Frequency Tolerance:

Input Phases:

—

See

Input Voltage Range/Tolerance on page 1-6

for Full Power and Operating Range

47-63 Hz

Three-phase input provides full rating for all drives. Single-phase operation provides 50% of rated current.

47-63 Hz.

Three-phase input provides full rating for all drives.

Single-phase operation provides 50% of rated current.

DC Input

Voltage Tolerance +/- 10% of Nominal Bus Voltage (above)

Displacement Power Factor: 0.98 across speed range

Efficiency:

Max. Short Circuit Current

Rating:

Using Recommended Fuse or Circuit Breaker Type

Maximum Drive to Motor Power

Ratio

97.5% at rated amps, nominal line volts.

Maximum short circuit current rating to match specified fuse/ circuit breaker capability.

≤ 200,000 Amps

The drive to motor rating cannot exceed a 2:1 ratio

—

0.98 across speed range

97.5% at rated amps, nominal line volts.

≤ 200,000 Amps

The drive to motor rating cannot exceed a 2:1 ratio


1-3

Category

Control

Specification

Method

Induction Motor:

Brushless Motor:

Carrier Frequency

Output Voltage Range:

Output Frequency Range:

Speed Control

Torque Regulation

Selectable Motor Control:

Stop Modes:

Accel/Decel

S-Curve Time

Intermittent Overload:

Current Limit Capability:

Electronic Motor Overload

Protection

Frames 1-6 Frames 9 & up

Sine coded PWM with programmable carrier frequency, Indirect

Self-Organized, Field-Oriented Control, Current-regulated.

Ratings apply to all drives (refer to the

Derating Guidelines on page 1-8 ). The drive can be supplied as 6 pulse or 12 pulse in a

configured package.

Sine coded PWM with programmable carrier frequency, Indirect

Self-Organized, Field-Oriented Control, Current-regulated.

Ratings apply to all drives (refer to the

Derating Guidelines on page 1-8 ). The drive can be supplied as 6 pulse or 12 pulse in a

configured package.

Drive rating: 4 kHz

Settings: 2, 4, 8, 10 kHz

0 to rated motor voltage

Drive rating: 2 kHz

Settings: 2, 4, 8, 10 kHz

0 to rated motor voltage

0 – 320 Hz

Speed regulation - without feedback

0.1% of base speed across 120:1 speed range

120:1 operating range

50 rad/sec bandwidth

Speed regulation - with feedback




Torque Regulation - without feedback

+/-10%, 600 rad/sec bandwidth

Torque Regulation - with feedback


Field Oriented Control with and without a feedback device and permanent magnet motor control

0 – 320 Hz

Speed regulation - without feedback




Speed regulation - with feedback




Torque Regulation - without feedback


Torque Regulation - with feedback


Field Oriented Control with and without a feedback device and permanent magnet motor control

Multiple programmable stop modes including – Ramp, Coast and Current Limit

Independently programmable accel and decel times adjustable from 0 to 6553.5 in 0.1 second increments.

Adjustable from 0.5 to 4.0 seconds

110% Overload capability for up to 1 minute

150% Overload capability for up to 3 seconds

Independent Motoring and Regenerative Power Limits programmable to 800% of rated output current

Multiple programmable stop modes including – Ramp, Coast and Current Limit

Independently programmable accel and decel times adjustable from 0 to 6553.5 in 0.1 second increments.

Adjustable from 0.5 to 4.0 seconds

110% Overload capability for up to 1 minute

150% Overload capability for up to 3 seconds

Independent Motoring and Regenerative Power Limits programmable to 800% of rated output current

Class 10 protection with speed sensitive response. Investigated by U.L. to comply with N.E.C. Article 430 U.L. File E59272, volume 12.

Class 10 protection with speed sensitive response. Investigated by U.L. to comply with N.E.C. Article 430 U.L. File E59272, volume 12.

1-4


Category Specification

Feedback

Encoder Inputs (2):

Frames 1-6

Dual Channel Plus Marker, Isolated with differential transmitter

Output (Line Drive) Incremental, Dual Channel Quadrature type

Customer-I/O Plug (P1) - Hi

Res:

Allen-Bradley PN: S94262912

Weidmuller PN: BL3.50/90/12BK

Frames 9 & up

Dual Channel Plus Marker, Isolated with differential transmitter

Output (Line Drive) Incremental, Dual Channel Quadrature type

Encoder Voltage Supply: 5V DC or 12 V DC 320 mA/channel

5V DC requires an external power supply.

12 V DC minimum high state voltage of 7V DC, maximum low state voltage of 0.4V DC

Maximum Input Frequency: 400 kHz

Stegmann Option:

Encoder Voltage Supply: 11.5V DC @ 130 mA

Hi-Resolution Feedback: Sine/Cosine 1V P-P Offset 2.5

Maximum Cable Length:

RS-485 Interface:

182 m (600 ft.)

Hi-Resolution Feedback Option card obtains the following information via the Hiperface RS-485 interface shortly after power-up: Address, Command Number, Mode, Number of turns,

Number of Sine/Cos cycles, Checksum

5V DC or 12 V DC 320 mA/channel

5V DC requires an external power supply.

12 V DC minimum high state voltage of 7V DC, maximum low state voltage of 0.4V DC

500 kHz

11.5V DC @ 130 mA

Sine/Cosine 1V P-P Offset 2.5

182 m (600 ft.)

Hi-Resolution Feedback Option card obtains the following information via the Hiperface RS-485 interface shortly after power-up: Address, Command Number, Mode, Number of turns, Number of Sine/Cos cycles, Checksum

Allen-Bradley PN: S94262912

Weidmuller PN: BL3.50/90/12BK

Resolver Option:

Excitation Frequency:

Excitation Voltage: 4.25-26 Vrms

Operating Frequency Range: 1 - 10 kHz

Resolver Feedback Voltage: 2V ± 300 mV

Maximum Cable Length:

DriveLogix

User Available MemoryBase:

With Memory Expansion

Board:

Battery:

Serial Cable:

2400 Hz

304.8 meters (1000 ft.)

256 kbytes

768 kbytes

1756-BA1 (Allen-Bradley PN 94194801) 0.59g lithium

1761-CBLPM02 to 1761-NET-AIC

1761-CBLPA00 to 1761-NET-AIC

1756-CP3 directly to controller

1747-CP3 directly to controller category 3 (2)

Flex I/O Connection: Up to (8) modules

FLEXBUS Current Output: 640 mA maximum @ 5.1V dc

Cable: 4100-CCF3

2400 Hz

4.25-26 Vrms

1 - 10 kHz

2V ± 300 mV

304.8 meters (1000 ft.)

256 kbytes

768 kbytes

1756-BA1 (Allen-Bradley PN 94194801) 0.59g lithium

1761-CBLPM02 to 1761-NET-AIC

1761-CBLPA00 to 1761-NET-AIC

1756-CP3 directly to controller

1747-CP3 directly to controller category 3 (2)

Up to (8) modules

640 mA maximum @ 5.1V dc

4100-CCF3

Input/Output Ratings


1-5

Each PowerFlex has heavy duty torque capabilities. The drive ratings can be found on pages

2-49 -

2-56

. Also see Drive Overload on page 2-34 .

The drive’s IT protection dictates overload cap’s amount and duty cycle. Ratings are in the tables listed below.

Table 1.A

shows expected times.

Table 1.A IT Curve

10000000.0

1000000.0

100000.0

10000.0

1000.0

100.0

10.0

1.0

102.5%

104% 106%

108%

110%

112%

Current (%)

114%

120%

130%

140% 150%

Current

110

109

108

107

114

113

112

111

130

125

120

115

150%

145

140

135

106

105

104

103

102.5

Time On(s)

20.7

24.7

3038

40.7

60.0

69.2

81.8

100.0

3.0

3.4

3.9

4.7

5.7

7.4

10.4

17.8

128.6

180.0

300.0

900.0

4500000

Time On(s) =time at current level shown

Time Off(s) = time at 100% current

Duty Cycle % =time on/(time on +time of)*100

Time Off(s)

180

180

180

180

95

104

117

138

180

180

180

180

180

63

66

73

89

57

58

59

61

Duty Cycle

17.9

19.2

20.8

22.7

25.0

27.8

31.2

35.7

5.0%

5.6

6.3

7.1

8.3

10.0

12.5

16.7

41.7

50.0

62.5

83.3

100.0

The On Times/Off Times ratio is fixed. If only 1/2 of the listed time is spent at a given level, the only 1/2 the off time is necessary to reset the cycle.

1-6


Input Voltage Range/

Tolerance

Drive Rating

200-240

380-400

500-600

(Frames 1-4 Only)

500-690

(Frames 5 & 6 Only)

Drive Full Power Range =

Drive Operating Range =

Nominal Line

Voltage

200

208

240

380

400

480

600

Nominal Motor

Voltage

Drive Full

Power Range

200†

208

230

380†

400

460

575†

200-264

208-264

230-264

380-528

400-528

460-528

575-660

Drive

Operating

Range

180-264

342-528

432-660

600

690

575†

690

575-660

690-759

475-759

475-759

Nominal Motor Voltage to Drive Rated Voltage + 10%.

Rated current is available across the entire Drive Full Power Range

Lowest† Nominal Motor Voltage - 10% to Drive Rated Voltage +

10%.

Drive Output is linearly derated when Actual Line Voltage is less than the Nominal Motor Voltage

Heat Dissipation

Example:

No Drive

Output

Derated Power Range

Full Power Range

Drive Operating Range

Nominal Motor Voltage -10%

Nominal Motor Voltage

Drive Rated Voltage

Drive Rated Voltage +10%

Actual Line Voltage (Drive Input)

Calculate the maximum power of a 5 HP, 460V motor connected to a 480V rated drive supplied with 342V Actual Line Voltage input.

• Actual Line Voltage / Nominal Motor Voltage = 74.3%

• 74.3% × 5 HP = 3.7 HP

• 74.3% × 60 Hz = 44.6 Hz

At 342V Actual Line Voltage, the maximum power the 5 HP, 460V motor can produce is

3.7 HP at 44.6 Hz.

5 HP

3.7 HP

No Drive

Output

342V

460V

Actual Line Voltage (Drive Input)

480V

528V

See

Watts Loss on page 2-153

Mounting


1-7

Figure 1.1 Minimum Mounting Clearance Requirements

101.6mm

(4.0 in.)

No Adhesive Label

(see below)

50.8mm (2.0 in)

101.6mm

(4.0 in.) With Adhesive Label

(see below)

101.6mm

(4.0 in.)

50.8mm (2.0 in)

101.6mm

(4.0 in.)

1-8


Derating Guidelines

PowerFlex 700S Altitude and Efficiency

Frame Type

All Altitude

Derate

100%

90%

Efficiency

(typical)

80%

70%

0 1,000 2,000 3,000

Altitude (m)

4,000 5,000 6,000

100

95

90

85

80

75 vs. Speed vs. Load

10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100

% Speed/% Load


1-9

Frame Voltage

1 400V

ND

Rating Enclosure

11 kW

• Open

• NEMA Type1

• IP20

Frequency

(1)

2-6kHz

Derate

50

45

40

35

30

25

20

40 50 60 70

% of Output FLA

80

6 kHz

8 kHz

90

10 kHz

100

460V 15 HP

• Open

• NEMA Type1

• IP20

2-6kHz

2 400V 15kW

• Open

• NEMA Type1

• IP20

50

45

40

35

30

25

20

40

50

45

40

35

40 50

50 60 70

% of Output FLA

80

60 70

% of Output FLA

80

6 kHz

8 kHz

10 kHz

90 100

8 kHz

90

10 kHz

100

460V 20 HP

• Open

• NEMA Type1

• IP20

10 kHz

50

48

46

44

42

40

40 50 60 70

% of Output FLA

80

10 kHz

90 100

25 HP

• Open

• NEMA Type1

• IP20

6-10 kHz

50

40

30

20

10

0

40 50 60 70

% of Output FLA

80

6 kHz

8 kHz

10 kHz

90 100

1-10


Frame Voltage

3 400V

ND


18.5 kW

• Open

• NEMA Type1

• IP20

Frequency

(1)

6-10 kHz

Derate

50

40

30

20

10

0

40

400V 22 kW

30 kW

• Open

• NEMA Type1

• IP20

• Open

• NEMA Type1

• IP20

2-10 kHz

6-10 kHz

None

50

40

30

20

10

40

37 kW

• Open

• NEMA Type1

• IP20

4-10 kHz

50

40

30

20

10

0

40

460 V 30 HP

40 HP

• Open

• NEMA Type1

• IP20

• Open

• NEMA Type1

• IP20

2-10 kHz

6-10 kHz

None

50

40

50

50

50

30

20

10

40 50

50 HP

• Open

• NEMA Type1

• IP20

6-10 kHz

50

40

30

20

10

0

40 50

60 70

% of Output FLA

80

60 70

% of Output FLA

80

60 70

% of Output FLA

80

60 70 80

60 70

% of Output FLA

80

90

10 kHz

100

6 kHz

8 kHz

90

10 kHz

100

6 kHz

10 kHz

8 kHz

90

90

10 kHz

100

6 kHz

10 kHz

8 kHz

90

6 kHz

8 kHz

4 kHz

6 kHz

8 kHz

100

100

Dimensions


1-11

Frame Voltage

5 400V

460V

ND


55 kW

75 HP

100 HP

• Open

• NEMA Type1

• IP20

• Open

• NEMA Type1

• IP20

• Open

• NEMA Type1

• IP20

Frequency

2-8 kHz

2-8 kHz

4 kHz

6-8 kHz

(1)

Derate

None

None

None

50

45

40

35

30

25

20

15

40

(1)

Consult the factory for further derate information at other frequencies.

6 kHz

8 kHz

50 60 70

% of Output FLA

80 90 100

The following are the PowerFlex 700S dimensions.

Table 1.B PowerFlex 700S Frames

Frame

1

2

3

4

5

6

9

10

AC Input

208/240 400V 480V 600V

DC Input

540V 650V

ND HP HD HP ND kW HD kW ND HP HD HP ND HP HD HP ND HP HD HP ND HP HD HP

50

60

75

–

–

25

30

40

10

–

15

20

2

3

5

7.5

–

–

–

–

—

–

40

50

60

–

–

20

25

30

7.5

–

10

15

3

5

1.5

2

–

–

–

–

—

–

37

45

–

55

–

75

90

110

–

–

7.5

11

15

18.5

22

30

–

–

–

–

132

–

–

55

75

90

30

37

–

45

–

–

5.5

7.5

11

15

18.5

22

–

–

–

–

110

–

50

60

–

75

100

125

150

–

20

25

30

40

–

–

10

15

200

200

250

300

350

450

40

50

–

60

75

100

125

–

15

20

25

30

–

–

7.5

10

150

150

200

250

300

350

50

60

–

75

–

–

100

–

20

25

30

40

–

–

10

15

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

75

–

40

50

–

60

15

20

25

30

–

–

7.5

10

–

–

–

–

–

–

37

45

–

55

–

75

90

110

–

–

7.5

11

15

18.5

22

30

–

–

–

–

132

–

–

55

75

90

30

37

–

45

–

–

5.5

7.5

11

15

18.5

22

–

–

–

–

110

–

50

60

–

75

100

125

150

–

20

25

30

40

–

–

10

15

–

–

–

–

200

–

40

50

–

60

75

100

125

–

15

20

25

30

–

–

7.5

10

–

–

–

–

150

–

1-12


Figure 1.2 PowerFlex 700S Frame 1-3 (Frame 1 Shown)

12.5 (0.49)

A

D

7.0 (0.28) typ

C

B

E

2

3

Frame

➊

1

A

200.0 (7.87)

285.0 (11.22)

285.0 (11.22)

7.0 (0.28)

D

7.0 (0.28) typ

Dimensions are in millimeters and (inches)

B

389.0 (15.31)

389.0 (15.31)

564.0 (22.20)

C

202.8 (7.98)

202.7 (7.98)

202.7 (7.98)

D

175.0 (6.89)

250.0 (9.84)

250.0 (9.84)

E

375.0 (14.76)

375.0 (14.76)

550.0 (21.65)

Weight

➋

kg (lbs.)

Drive

11.3 (24.92)

18.4 (40.57)

26.6 (58.65)

➊

➋

Refer to

Table 1.B

for frame information.

Weights include HIM, DriveLogix controller with ControlNet daughtercard, Hi-Resolution Encoder Option, and

20-COMM-C ControlNet adapter.

Figure 1.3 PowerFlex 700S Frame 4

A

D

7.5 (0.30)

13.0 (0.55)

7.0 (0.27) 2 Places

15.1 (0.59)

369.5 (14.53)

348.9 (13.76)

S


1-13

C

E

B

Frame

➊

4

A (Max.)

220.8 (8.69)

8.0 (0.31)

Lifting Holes

3 Places

4 Places

8.0

(0.31)


B

758.8 (29.9)

C (Max.)

201.8 (7.94)

D

192.0 (7.56)

E

741.7 (29.2)

Approx. Weight

➋

kg (lbs.)

Drive

Drive &

Packaging

28.4 (62.5) 29.03 (63.9)

➊

➋

Refer to

Table 1.B




1-14



369.4 (14.54)

70.1 (2.76)

6.50 (0.26)

7.5 (0.30)

D

6.50 (0.26)

41.9 (1.65)

7.5 (0.30)

C

369.0 (14.53)

349.5 (13.76)

B

Overall

Height

75 HP

Frame 5

E

Frame

5

689.6 (27.15)

Overall

Height

100HP

Frame 5

A

308.9(12.16)

6.50 (0.26)

A

Conduit Box

NOT Present

On 75 HP Frame 5


B C

644.5(25.37) 275.4(10.84)

➊

➋

➌

D

225.0(8.86) 625.0(24.61) 37.19 (82)

Refer to

Table 1.B




When using the supplied junction box (100 HP drives Only), add an additional 45.1 mm (1.78 in.) to this dimension.

15.5 (0.61)

8.0 (0.31)

6.50 (0.26)

2 Places


466.7 (18.38)

A

360.6 (14.20)

D

8.5 (0.33)

Detail

11.5 (0.45)

18.0 (0.71)

369.0 (14.53)

349.5 (13.76)

S

E B


1-15

C

Frame

➊

6

8.5 (0.33)

126.3

(4.97)


Lifting Holes - 4 Places

12.7 (0.50) Dia.

A (Max.)

403.80 (15.90)

B

850.00 (33.46)

C (Max.)

275.50 (10.85)

D

300.00 (11.81)

E

825.0 (157.5)

Approx. Weight

➋

kg (lbs.)

Drive

Drive and

Packaging

70.31 (154.70) 89.09 (196.00)

➊

➋

Refer to

Table 1.B




➌ When using the supplied junction box (100 HP drives Only), add an additional 45.1 mm (1.78 in.) to this dimension.

1-16



5.0 (0.20)

14.0 (0.55)

480.0 (18.90)

400.0 (15.75)

240.0 (9.45)

45.0 (1.77)

9.0 (0.35)

Wire Way

1150.0

(45.28)

1120.0

(44.09)

S

Nameplate

363.3 (14.32)

339.5 (13.37)

Nameplate

Frame

9

A

480 (18.9)

B

1150 (45.28)

C

339 (13.37)

9.0 (0.35)

Dimensions are in millimeters and (inches).

D

400 (15.75)

Lifting Hole

21.0 (0.83)

E

1120 (44.09)

Weight kg (lbs.)

Drive

142.9 (315)

Drive & Packaging

176.9 (390)


1-17

Frame 1

25.5

(1.00)

173.5 (6.83)

152.5 (6.00)

132.5 (5.22)

72.5 (2.85)

Figure 1.7 PowerFlex 700S Bottom View Dimensions, Frame 1, 2 & 3

Frame 2

22.4 (0.88) Dia.

2 Places

28.7 (1.13) Dia.

3 Places

190.4

(7.50)

136.1

(5.36)

187.9

(7.40)

187.6

(7.39)

160.3

(6.31)

153.7

(6.05)

114.9

(4.52)

65.0 (2.56)

104.3 (4.11)

122.2 (4.81)

137.7 (5.42)

108.0 (4.25)

135.0 (5.31)

140.9 (5.55)

161.0 (6.34)

Frame 3 - All Drives, except 50 HP, 480V

170.3 (6.70)

159.7 (6.29)

22.2 (0.87) Dia.

28.7 (1.13) Dia.

2 places

171.0 (6.73)

201.4 (7.93)

242.4 (9.54)

Frame 3 - 50 HP, 480V Normal Duty Drive

37.3 (1.47) Dia.

2 places

28.7 (1.13) Dia.

2 Places

170.3 (6.70)

159.7 (6.29)

34.9 (1.37) Dia.

2 Places

46.7 (1.84) Dia.

2 Places

167.9

(6.61)

153.9

(6.06)

130.5

(5.14)

162.9

(6.41)

187.3

(7.37)

167.9

(6.61)

130.5

(5.14)

162.9

(6.41)

187.3

(7.37)

87.7 (3.45)

94.0 (37.0)

131.0 (5.16)

162.0 (6.38)

202.2 (7.96)

252.0 (9.92)

87.7 (3.45)

94.0 (3.70)

131.0 (5.16)

202.2 (7.96)

252 (9.92)

Dimensions are in millimeters and (inches).

1-18


22.2 (0.87) Dia.

65.0 (2.56)

26.8 (1.06)

36.8 (1.45)

51.5 (2.03)

Figure 1.8 PowerFlex 700S Bottom View Dimensions, Frame 4, 5 & 6

Frame 5 - 75 HP, 480 V (55kW, 400V)

76.0 (2.99)

65.3 (2.57)

Phase I Frame 4

28.7 (1.13) Dia.

2 Places

47.0 (1.85) Dia.

2 Places

54.1 (2.13) Dia.

2 Places

169.0 (6.65)

158.2 (6.23)

34.9 (1.37) Dia.

2 Places 22.2 (0.87) Dia.

2 Places

62.7 (2.47) Dia.

2 Places

63.8 (2.51)

112.8 (4.44)

180.8 (7.12)

105.1

(4.14)

141.9

(5.59)

157.9

(6.21)

177.9

(7.00)

189.7

(7.47)

241.9

(9.52)

229.5

(9.04)

220.0

(8.66)

184.0

(7.24)

159.0

(6.26)

95.8

(3.77)

65.0 (2.56)

93.0 (3.66)

110.0 (4.33)

150.0 (5.91)

215.0 (8.46)

280.0 (11.02)

320.0 (12.60)

Frame 5 - 100 HP, 480 V (55kW, 400V)

107.6 (4.24)

96.9 (3.81)

34.9 (1.37) Dia.

22.2 (0.87) Dia.

2 Places

62.7 (2.47) Dia.

2 Places

Removable Junction Box

241.9

(9.52)

223.5

(8.80)

188.5

(7.42)

184.3

(7.26)

153.7

(6.05)

96.0

(3.78)

65.0 (2.56)

93.0 (3.66)

109 (4.29)

131.4 (5.17)

193 (7.60)

297.3 (11.70)

123.5 (4.86)

112.9 (4.44)

Frame 6

34.9 (1.37) Dia.

62.7 (2.47) Dia.

3 Places

22.2 (0.87) Dia.

4 Places

Removable Junction Box

151.8

(5.98)

185.4

(7.30)

275.5

(10.85)

219.0

(8.62)

242.0

(9.53)

222.3

(8.75)

148.5

(5.85)

116.6

(4.59)

67.3 (2.65)

114.4 (4.5)

119.4 (4.7)

136.4 (5.37)

197.4 (7.77)

297.4 (11.7)

347.4 (13.7)

397.4 (15.6)



1-19

Figure 1.9 PowerFlex 700S Bottom View Dimensions, Frame 9

62.5 (2.46)

372.5 (14.67)

292.5 (11.52)

142.5 (5.61)

59.0 (2.32)

191.64

(7.54)

100.12

(3.94)

245.53

(9.67)

285.0

(11.22)

Detail A

Brake Option Top Hat


1-20


Notes:

Accel Time

Alarms

Chapter

2

Detailed Drive Operation

This chapter explains PowerFlex 700S drive functions in detail. Explanations are organized in alphabetically by topic. Refer to the Table of Contents for a listing of topics in this chapter.

!

ATTENTION:

Only qualified personnel familiar with the

PowerFlex 700S Drive and associated machinery should plan or implement the installation, start-up and subsequent maintenance of the system. Failure to comply may result in personal injury and/or equipment damage.

Refer to Chapter 2 - “Start-Up” of the

PowerFlex 700S High Performance AC Drive Phase I Control - User

Manual, publication 20D-UM001 for detailed information on applying power to a drive.

Parameter 32 [Accel Time] sets the rate at which the drive ramps up its output after a Start command or during an increase in desired speed (speed change).

The rate established is the result of the programmed Accel Time and the programmed motor rated speed, parameter 4 [Motor NP RPM].

Parameter 4 [Motor NP RPM]

Parameter 32 [Accel Time]

=

Accel Rate

Times are adjustable in 0.0001 second increments from 0.01 to 6553.5 seconds.

Alarms indicate conditions within the drive that could affect drive operation or application operation. Alarms are selected during commissioning of the drive.

Examples of alarms include: Encoder loss, communication loss or other exceptions within the drive.

Configuration:

Parameters 365 [Fdbk LsCnfg Pri] through 394 [VoltFdbkLossCnfg] and parameters 940 [+Sft OvrTrvlCnfg] through 944 [Positin Err Cnfg] program the response of the drive to various conditions. Responses include Ignore, Alarm, Fault

Coast Stop, Fault Ramp Stop, and Fault Current Limit Stop.

Parameters 326 [Alarm Status 1] through 328 [Alarm Status 3] indicated any alarms that are active.

Application Example:

Parameter 376 [Inv Ol Pend Cnfg] is set to a value of 1 "Alarm". This configures the drive to set the alarm bit, parameter 326 [Alarm Status 1] bit 15 "Inv OL Pend"

2-2

Detailed Drive Operation

Analog Inputs

when the inverter overload pending event occurs. This alarm will allow the drive to continue running. The user can make the decision as to what action to take in relation to the alarm.

Analog Input Specifications

There are 2 analog inputs located on TB1 - Row B (Bottom Terminals). Each input accepts a +/-10V or +/-1V bipolar, differential signal. Dip switches SW1-1 and

SW1-2 are used to select whether the analog inputs are +/-10V or +/-1V. The A/D converter is 14 bits including the sign bit (13 bits plus the sign bit).

Analog Input Configuration

Once the Analog Input is converted, [Anlg Inx Offset] can be applied. This parameter has a range of +/-20V. [Anlg Inx Volts] is the sum of the A/D output and

[Anlg Inx Offset]. [Anlg Inx Volts] are displayed as +/-10V.

[Anlg Inx Scale] scales [Anlg Inx Volts] to the range of [Anlg Inx Data]. A destination parameter, such as a speed reference can then be linked to [Anlg Inx

Data].

-

TB1-B11

TB1-B10

+

Anlg ln1 Offset

A/D

14bit

803

Anlg ln1 Scale

+

802

Al 1 Filt Gain

Anlg ln1 Filt BW

801

Anlg ln1 Volts

X

804

805

(kn * s) + wn s + wn

Lead Lag

Anlg ln1 Data

800

Shield

TB1-B9

-

TB1-B8

TB1-B7

+

Anlg ln2 Offset

807 Anlg ln2 Volts

A/D

14bit

+

X

809

Anlg ln2 Scale 808

Al 2 Filt Gain

Anlg ln2 Filt BW

810

811

(kn * s) + wn s + wn

Lead Lag

Anlg ln2 Data

806

[AIx Filt Gain] and [Anlg Inx Filt BW] are used to filter the analog input data.

Analog Outputs


2-3

Configuration Example:

This example illustrates how to setup a speed reference to follow a 0-10V analog input signal and null out a small amount of offset from the A/D converter on the analog input.

• 803 [Anlg ln1 Offset] = -0.0144V

• 802 [Anlg ln1 Scale] = 0.1 per 1V

• 804 [Anlg ln1 Filt Gain] = 1

• 805 [Anlg ln1Filt BW] = 0

• 10 [Spd Ref 1] is linked to 800 [Anlg ln1 Data]

With a desired [Anlg In1 Volts] of 0V, the drive was reading 0.0144V. To null out analog input 1, [Anlg In1 Offset] was set to -0.0144V.

[Spd Ref 1] is a per unit parameter, meaning that a value of 1 equates to base motor

RPM. Therefore, to scale [Anlg In1 Data] to give us a value from 0 to 1 for a 0-10V signal, [Anlg In1 Scale] was set to 0.1 per 1V.

[Anlg In1 Filt BW] was set to 0 so that no filtering took place on analog input 1.

Analog Output Specifications

There are 2 analog outputs located on TB1 - Row B (Bottom Terminals). Each output outputs a +/-10V bipolar, differential signal. The D/A converter is 12 bits including the sign (11 bits plus the sign bit).

Analog Output Configuration

The analog outputs can be linked to either an integer parameter or a real parameter.

Use [Anlg Outx Real] when you are linking to a real parameter and use [Anlg Outx

Integer] when you are linking to an integer parameter.

Anlg Out1 Offset

Anlg Out1 Integer

Anlg Out1 Real

812

814

815

+

Limit

X

+

816

D/A

12bit

Anlg Out1 Volts

-

TB1-B5

TB1-B6

+

Anlg Out1 Scale

817

10 [x]

818

Anlg Out1 Zero

1

[x]

Shield

TB1-B4

Anlg Out2 Offset

Anlg Out2 Integer

Anlg Out2 Real

813

819

820

Anlg Out2 Scale

822

+

10 [x]

Limit

X

823

Anlg Out1 Zero

+

816

D/A

12bit

Anlg Out1 Volts

-

TB1-B5

TB1-B6

+

1

[x]

2-4


Auto/Manual

Autotune

[Anlg Outx Offset] is added to [Anlg Outx Real] or [Anlg Outx Integer] before the scaling and limiting blocks. [Anlg Outx Offset] has a range of +/-20V.

The result of [Anlg Outx Offset] plus [Anlg Outx Real] or [Anlg Outx Integer] is limited by 10 times the value of [Anlg Outx Scale].

Then that limited value is divided by the value of [Anlg Outx Scale].

[Anlg Outx Zero] is added after the scaling and limiting of the analog output value.

[Anlg Outx Zero] can be used to null out any offset from the D/A converter.

Example Configuration 1:

This configuration sends the motor torque current reference value to a 0-10V analog output signal.

• [Anlg Out1 Real] is linked to [Mtr TrqCurr Ref]

• [Anlg Out1 Scale] = 0.1 per Volt

[Mtr TrqCurr Ref] is a real parameter expressed in per unit. Therefore a value of 1 corresponds to 100% motor torque. [Anlg Out1 Real] is used because [Mtr TrqCurr

Ref] is a real parameter.

[Anlg Out1 Scale] is set to 0.1 per 1V so that when [Mtr TrqCurr Ref] = 1p.u., the analog output = 1 / 0.1 = 10V.


This configuration sends [Position Error] out to a 0-10V analog output signal.

• [Anlg Out1 Integer] is linked to [Position Error]

• [Anlg Out1 Scale] is set to 214748664.8 per Volt

[Position Error] is an integer parameter with a range from -2147483648 to

+2147483648. [Anlg Out1 Integer] is used because [Position Error] is an integer parameter.

[Anlg Out1 Scale] is set to 214748364.8 per Volt so the analog output will give

-10V when the position error is -2147483648 and will give +10V when the position error is +2147483648.

The Auto/Manual function on the LCD HIM is not functional on the PowerFlex®

700S.

Auto-tuning is a procedure that involves running a group of tests on the motor/drive combination. Some tests are checking the drive hardware while others configure the drive parameters to maximize the performance of the attached motor.

The auto-tuning procedure can be completed using the Start-Up menu of the HIM.

Please refer to Chapter 2 - “Start-Up” of the PowerFlex 700S High Performance AC

Drive Phase I Control - User Manual, publication 20D-UM001, for information on starting-up the PowerFlex 700S AC drive and running the auto-tune procedure.


2-5

Autotune - Start-Up Menu

The Start-Up menu prompts the user for information and yes/no responses as required. The “Motor Control,” “Motor Data,” “Feedback Configuration,” “Power

Circuit Test,” “Direction Test,” “Motor Tests,” and “Inertia Measure” submenus of the Start-Up Menu are all related to the autotuning of the drive/motor combination and will be covered in this section.

Motor Control

The Motor Control submenu asks you to select the motor control operating mode which sets the parameter 485 [Motor Ctrl Mode]. Choices are “FOC,” “FOC2,”

“Pmag Motor” and “Test.”

• “FOC” selects field oriented control. This should be the selection for AC squirrel cage induction motors

• “FOC2” selects field oriented control and is only used for a specific type of AC induction motor with motor thermal feedback.

• “Pmag Motor” selects control for permanent magnet motors

• “Test” puts the drive in a test mode to perform the direction test. “Test” is automatically selected during the direction test portion of the Start-Up routine, and does not need to be set manually by the user.

Next, the motor control submenu asks you to select whether you have no dynamic braking, an internal resistor for dynamic braking, or an external resistor for dynamic braking. When no dynamic braking is selected, the bus regulator is turned

on (see Bus Regulation/Braking of this manual for more details).

Motor Data

This submenu asks you to enter whether the motor power is in units of kW or HP.

Then you are prompted to enter the motor nameplate data. Accurate motor nameplate data is important for tuning the drive to the connected motor.

Feedback Configuration

The Feedback Configuration submenu asks you to select the feedback device type.

Possible selections are “Encoder 0,” “Encoder 1,” “Aux Speed,” “Motor Sim,” or

“Option Card.” Encoder 0 and Encoder 1 are for the encoders on the I/O board.

When “Encoder 0” or “Encoder 1” are selected, you must also enter the encoder ppr. “Motor Sim” is to simulate a motor when there is no motor connected to the drive. “Option Card” can be chosen when either the Resolver or Hi-Resolution

Encoder option cards are installed.

Power Circuit Test

This submenu allows you to perform a diagnostic check to check the output section of the drive power circuit for shorts or open circuits.

Direction Test

The direction test checks the actual direction relative to the commanded direction, and checks for proper encoder feedback. The test prompts you to answer if the motor direction is correct. When it is not, you can either power down and swap two

2-6

Detailed Drive Operation of the motor leads, or change the drive’s logic to change the motor direction. Then the test is performed again. The test then checks if the feedback is positive. When it is not, you can either power down and swap two of the encoder signals, or you can change the drive’s logic to change the sign of the feedback. Then the test is performed again.

Motor Tests

This submenu performs the tests to measure the motor characteristics. These tests can be performed with the motor coupled or uncoupled to the load, but be aware that the motor will rotate during some of the tests.

For Field Oriented Control the following motor tests are performed:

Stator Resistance Test

This test identifies the motor stator resistance and stores the value into parameter

491 [StatorResistance]. The motor should not rotate during this test.

Stator Inductance Test

This test identifies the motor stator inductance and stores the value into parameter

490 [StatorInductance]. The motor should not rotate during this test.

Leakage Inductance Test

This test measures the inductance characteristics of the motor. A measurement of the motor inductance is required to determine references for the regulators that control torque. The motor should not rotate during this test. The test runs for approximately 1 minute and then stores the calculated value into parameter 492 [LeakInductance]. A typical value is between 15 and 25%.

Flux Current Test

This test is used to identify the value of motor flux current required to produce rated motor torque at rated current. When the flux test is performed, the motor will rotate. The drive accelerates the motor to the speed set in parameter 19 [Atune Spd Ref] (default is 85% of base speed) and then coasts for several seconds. This cycle may repeat several times, then decelerate to a low speed and shut off. This test stores the value for flux current in parameter 488 [Flux Current].

For Permanent Magnet Control the following motor tests are performed:

Stator Resistance Test

This test identifies the motor stator resistance and stores the value into parameter 522 [PM Stator

Resist]. The motor should not rotate during this test.

Stator Inductance Test

This test identifies the motor stator inductance and stores the value into parameter 520 [PM Q

Inductance] and 521 [PM D Inductance]. The motor should not rotate during this test.

Encoder Offset

The absolute position sensor counter offset from the rotor flux center position for a Permanent

Magnet (PM) motor. This value is determined by an automated measurement procedure, which uses parameter 505 [PM TestWait Time], 506 [PM Test Idc Ramp], 507 [PM Test FreqRamp], 508

[PM Test Freq Ref] and 509 [PM Test I Ref]. First, the Flux Producing (d-axis) current is applied to the stator, starting with 0A and with 0 Hz. Current increases with the ramp rate defined by parameter 506 [PM Test Idc Ramp] to the peak current value defined by parameter 509 [PM Test I

Ref]. The current is continuously applied at this level for the time interval defined by parameter 505

[PM TestWait Time]. Then, the DC excitation position will be changed by 90 electrical degrees with the frequency defined by parameter 508 [PM Test Freq Ref] and the rate change of the frequency defined by parameter 507 [PM Test FreqRamp]. The 90 degree phase shifted d-axis current with the current value defined by parameter 509 [PM Test I Ref] is continuously applied for the time interval defined by parameter 505 [PM TestWait Time] The value of parameter 504 [PM AbsEnc

Offst] is determined by value in the absolute position sensor counter.

Back EMF

Measures the permanent magnet motor CEMF (motor voltage feedback) coefficient and stores the value in parameter 523 [PM Mtr CEMF Coef].

Auxiliary Power Supply


2-7

Inertia Test

The final test is the inertia calculation. The motor and load (machine) inertia is used to set the bandwidth of the speed regulator. During the test the motor will accelerate to the speed set in parameter 19 [Atune Spd Ref] at a specified torque set by parameter 129 [Atune Torq Ref]. The test then calculates the time in seconds to accelerate the motor at rated torque from zero to base speed and stores that value in parameter 9 [Total Inertia].

Troubleshooting a “MC Commissn Fail” Fault during Autotune

The “MC Commissn Fail” fault occurs when either the Power Circuits diagnostics test fails or one of the Motor Tests fails. To find out specifically why the fault occurred, before clearing the fault, check the bits in the following parameters: 552

[MC Diag Error 1], 553 [MC Diag Error 2], or 554 [MC Diag Error 3].

You may use an auxiliary power supply to keep the 700S Control Assembly energized when input power is de-energized. This allows the Main Control

Board, DriveLogix controller and any feedback option cards to continue operation. Refer to User Manual for connection information.

Frames 1-6

Refer to the Auxiliary Power Supply option (20-24V-AUX1) and publication

PFLEX-IN010.

Frames 9 & Up

You must set Par 153 [Control Options]/bit 17 [Aux Pwr Sply] to enable this feature.

Auxiliary Power Supply Specifications

Voltage Current (Min) Power (Min)

24V DC ± 5% 3 A 75 W

Bus Regulation/Braking

Description

This information serves as a supplement to the PowerFlex® 700S - Phase I Control

User Manual, publication 20D-UM001, addressing items specific to the PowerFlex

700S bus regulation and dynamic braking. Please refer to the User Manual for details on the PowerFlex 700S dynamic braking wiring and setup and the

PowerFlex® Dynamic Braking Resistor Calculator Selection Guide, publication

PFLEX-AT001, for application techniques on dynamic braking. These publications are available online at: http://literature.rockwellautomation.com/literature

Technical Information

The bus regulator limits the maximum bus voltage for systems that do not have (or have limited) braking or regenerative capabilities. The bus regulator limits the bus voltage by comparing the DC bus voltage feedback to a DC bus voltage reference.

2-8


Bus/Reg Brake Ref

415

Rated Volts

100

401

2

Brake/Bus Confg

(Brake Enable)

(BusRef Hi/Lo)

/

X

414

00

02

X

0.045

&

It then limits the regenerative power allowed back onto the DC bus to keep the DC bus voltage at or below the reference value and prevent a “DC Bus Overvolt” fault.

Dynamic braking uses a 7th insulated gate bipolar transistor (IGBT) and braking resistor to dissipate regenerative energy. The drive switches the 7th IGBT on and off to keep the DC bus voltage at or below the DC bus voltage reference.

Parameters in the PowerFlex 700S specify whether the resistor is an internal or external resistor. For an external resistor, the user can program the resistor specifications for protection of the resistor. Only resistors specifically designed for pulse and high energy dissipation (dynamic braking) should be used.

The PowerFlex® 700S allows the user to select bus regulation, dynamic braking, or a combination of bus regulation and dynamic braking.

DC Bus Voltage

X

306

+

Motor Spd Fdbk

Mtring Power Lim

Regen Power Lim

300

127

128

+

-

Bus Volt

Regulator

Limit

Brake/Bus Cnfg

(Bus Reg En)

414

03

Power

Limit Calc

+

Torque Pos Limit 125

Iq Actual Lim

353

Torque Neg Limit

-1

126

Min

Torque PosLim Actl

123

Max

Torque NegLim Actl

124

Bus Regulator/Braking Configuration

Parameter 414 [Bus/Brake Cnfg] determines the configuration of bus regulation and dynamic braking. Parameter 414 is broken down into the following bits:

Bit 0 - Brake Enable

When this bit is set to 1 it enables the internal brake transistor (7th IGBT). When this bit is set to

0 then the internal brake transistor is disabled.

Bit 1 - Brake Extern

When this bit is set to a 1 it configures the brake operation for an external resistor. Then the external brake resistor protection is based on the peak watts entered into parameter 416 [Brake

PulseWatts] and the continuous watts entered in parameter 417 [Brake Watts]. When this bit is set to 0 it configures the brake operation for an internal resistor. Then 416 [Brake PulseWatts] and 417 [Brake Watts] are not active.

Bit 2 - BusRef Hi/Lo

This bit configures whether bus regulation or dynamic braking turns on first. This bit is only active when parameter 414 [Bus/Brake Cnfg] bits 0 and 3 are both set to 1. When this bit is set to 1 the dynamic braking turns on first (at the DC bus voltage set by parameter 415 [Bus Reg/Brake Ref]), and then the bus regulator turns on if the DC bus voltage continues to rise (at the DC bus voltage set by 415 [Bus Reg/Brake Ref] plus 4.5%). When this bit is set to 0 the bus regulator turns on first (at the DC bus voltage set by 415 [Bus Reg/Brake Ref]) and then the dynamic braking turns on when there are any transients above 415 [Bus Reg/Brake Ref].

Bit 3 - Bus Reg En

When this bit is set to 1, bus regulation is enabled. When this bit is set to 0, bus regulation is disabled.

Set the appropriate 414 [Bus/Brake Config] for your configuration. The following is a summary of possible settings for [Bus/Brake Config]:

Desired Operation

External regeneration

Dynamic braking with internal resistor

Dynamic braking with external resistor

Bus regulation only

Bus regulation first, then dynamic braking with internal resistor

[Bus/Brake Config]

Setting

0000

0001

0011

1000

1001


2-9

Dynamic braking with internal resistor first, then bus regulation

Bus regulation first, then dynamic braking with external resistor

Dynamic braking with external resistor first, then bus regulation

1101

1011

1111

Parameter 415 [Bus Reg/Brake Ref] sets the turn-on bus voltage threshold for the bus regulator and the dynamic brake. Actual values are modified by the configuration selected in [Bus/Brake Config]. When using common DC bus drives, adjustment of [Bus Reg/Brake Ref] allows a limited coordination of brake operation with other drives. For example, when you have two common bus drives, and one drive is larger than the other, set the larger drive to turn on at a lower voltage than the smaller drive. In this manner, the smaller drive does not try to dissipate all of the dynamic braking energy.

Note:

Actual bus voltage reference values are determined as a percentage of parameter 401 [Rated Volts] and the selected voltage class. bus voltage reference

=

2 Par 401 [Rated Volts] Par 415 [Bus Reg/Brake Ref]

100

VDC

For example, with a 480V rated drive and [BusReg/Brake Ref]=111%: bus voltage reference

=

2 480 111

100

=

753.5 VDC

Note:

When the low voltage class is selected an additional multiplier of

1.2 is used. For example parameter 401 [Rated Volts] = 400V AC, then parameter 401 * 1.2 = 480 VAC is used to determine the bus voltage reference: bus voltage reference

=

(

2 400 1.2 111

100

)

=

753.5 VDC

In this case, if a drive has a selected low voltage class, but is run on a high voltage class AC line, the dynamic brake will not automatically turn on.

Parameter 416 [Brake PulseWatts] sets the peak power reference for determining the protection for an external brake resistor. Parameter 416 is active only if the configuration is selected for an external brake (parameter 414 [Bus/Brake Cnfg] bit

1 is set to 1). When the internal brake resistor is used then the protection is determined from the drive-internal values. Normally this value is specified by the resistor vendor as the energy rating (in Joules) or a 1 second power rating (in Watts) with typical values in the range of 30 to 100 times higher than the resistor’s continuous power rating.

Parameter 416 [Brake Pulse Watts] = (Resistors peak energy in Joules)/1 Sec; where the resistor package’s peak energy rating is obtained from the resistor manufacturer.

When the resistor package’s peak energy rating cannot be obtained, there are a few other ways to approximate parameter 416 [Brake Pulse Watts]:

2-10


1. [Brake Pulse Watts] = 75,000 (watts/lbs) x Resistor element weight (lbs); where

75,000 represents a specific heat of 0.11 cal/Kg o

C (steel or nichrome) and a temperature rise of 350 o

C, and the resistor element weight is the total weight of the resistor wire element in pounds (not the entire weight of the resistor cage).

For example a resistor with a nichrome element that weights 10 lbs. would have:

Parameter 416 [Brake Pulse Watts]

=

75,000 10

=

750,000 Watts

2. [Brake Pulse Watts] = (Time Constant) x parameter 417 [Brake Watts]; where the Time constant equals the amount of time for the resistor to reach 63% of its rated temperature with applied rated watts (parameter 417 [Brake Watts]).

Parameter 417 [Brake Watts] sets the continuous watts for determining the protection for an external brake. Enter the continuous watt rating of the resistor cage (found on the resistor cage nameplate or from the resistor manufacturer) for this parameter. This parameter is active only if the configuration is selected for an external brake ([Bus/Brake Cnfg] bit 1 set to 1). When the internal brake resistor is used then the protection is determined from the drive-internal values.

Parameter 369 [Brake OL Cnfg] determines how the drive reacts when the brake protection is exceeded. Regardless of the parameter 369 [Brake OL Cnfg] setting, the drive does not command the 7th IGBT to switch when the brake resistor protection is exceeded. Some possible settings for this parameter are:

Parameter 369 [Brake OL Cnfg]

Setting

0 - “Ignore”

Drive Operation

The drive does not generate the fault 38 “Brake OL Trip” or alarm

“Brake OL Trip.”

1 - “Alarm”

2 - “FltCoastStop”

3 - “FltRampStop”

4 - “FltCurLimStop”

The drive generates an alarm “Brake OL Trip,” but does not generate the fault 38 “Brake OL Trip.”

The drive generates the fault 38 “Brake OL Trip” and issues a coast stop.

The drive generates the fault 38 “Brake OL Trip” and issues a ramp stop.

The drive generates the fault 38 “Brake OL Trip” and issues a current limit stop.

Parameter 418 [Brake TP Sel] selects a value to monitor for diagnostics of the dynamic brake protection. Possible selections for parameter 418 [Brake TP Sel] are:

Parameter 418 [Brake TP Sel]

Setting

0 - “Zero”

1 - “Duty Cycle”

2 - “Power Actual”

3 - “Max BodyTemp”

4 - “Max ElemTemp Act”

5 - “BodyTemp Act”

6 - “ElemTemp Act”

7 - “BTmpTrip Stat”

8 - “ETmpTripStat”

9 - “Int DB Ohms”

Description

Do not monitor any test point for the brake protection.

Actual duty cycle of the dynamic brake IGBT where a value of 0 in parameter 419 [Brake TP Data] = full open and 1 = full on.

Actual power applied to the resistor (Watts).

Maximum temperature that the resistor body can handle (°C).

Maximum temperature that the resistor element can handle (°C).

Predicted temperature of the resistor body (°C).

Predicted temperature of the resistor element (°C).

Maximum resistor body temperature has been exceeded when parameter 419 [Brake TP Data] = 1.

Maximum resistor element temperature has been exceeded when parameter 419 [Brake TP Data] = 1.

Rating of internal resistor when internal resistor is installed (Ohms).


2-11

10 - “Data State”

11 - “MC BrakeEnbl”

12 - “1/rdb”

13 - “1/th_eb”

14 - “1/ce”

15 - “tamax”

16 - “1/th_ba”

17 - “1/cb”

18 - “DB IGBT Amp”

A value of 0 in parameter 419 [Brake TP Data] = initial state, 1 = internal resistor data loaded, 2 = external resistor data loaded.

A value of 0 in parameter 419 [Brake TP Data] = dynamic braking disabled, 1 = dynamic braking enabled.

Inverse of the resistance (1/Ohms).

Inverse of the thermal impedance from the resistor element to body

(Watts/°C).

Inverse of the resistor element thermal mass (°C/W*sec).

Maximum ambient temperature of resistor (°C).

Inverse of the thermal impedance from the resistor body to element

(Watts/°C).

Inverse of the resistor body thermal mass (°C/W*sec).

IGBT current rating (Amps).

Parameter 419 [Brake TP Data] displays the data selected in parameter 418 [Brake

TP Sel].

Cable, Control

Refer to “Wiring and Grounding Guidelines for Pulse Width Modulated (PWM) AC

Drives,” publication DRIVES-IN001 for detailed information. This publication is available online at: http://literature.rockwellautomation.com/literature

Cable, Motor Lengths



Cable, Power



Cable Trays and Conduit



Carrier (PWM) Frequency

See

Chapter 1 for derating guidelines as they travel to carrier frequency.

Parameter 402 [PWM Frequency] sets the switching frequency. In general, the lowest possible switching frequency that is acceptable for any particular application is the one that should be used. There are several benefits to increasing the switching frequency. Refer to

Figure 2.1

and Figure 2.2

. Note the output current at 2 kHz and

4kHz. The “smoothing” of the current waveform continues all the way to 10 kHz.

2-12


Figure 2.1 Current at 2kHz PWM Frequency

Figure 2.2 Current at 4kHz PWM Frequency

Common Bus Systems

Communications

The benefits of increased carrier frequency include less motor heating and lower audible noise. An increase in motor heating is considered negligible and motor failure at lower switching frequencies is very remote. The higher switching frequency creates less vibration in the motor windings and laminations making lower audible noise. This may be desirable in some applications. Some undesirable effects of higher switching frequencies include derating ambient temperature vs. load characteristics of the drive, higher cable charging currents and higher potential for common mode noise.

A very large majority of all drive applications will perform adequately at 2-4 kHz.

Information not available at time of printing. For information on the 1336R Regen unit, see

Bus Regulation/Braking .

Refer to “Common Bus” publication DRIVES-IN001 for detailed information.

See individual adapters - ControlNet (20-COMM-C)

, DeviceNet (20-COMM-D) ,

Remote I/O Adapter (20-COMM-R) , etc.


2-13

ControlNet (20-COMM-C)

This information serves as a supplement to the PowerFlex® ControlNet Adapter

Users Manual, publication 20COMM-UM003, addressing items specific to the

PowerFlex 700S. Please refer to the User Manual for details on 20-COMM-C set-up, configuration, I/O messaging, and explicit messaging. This document does not apply to the DriveLogix communications to the 700S.

Setup Information

Parameters 25 [M-S Input] and 26 [M-S Output] of the 20-COMM-C must be configured for the Datalinks that are to be used. If changes are made to these parameters or others, parameter 9 [Reset Module] must be set to reset module for the change to take effect. Set rotary switches to the correct node address. Node 02 is used for all Datalinks in this example.

To use the 20-COMM-C on the PowerFlex 700S with ControlLogix use following setup when adding to the ControlNet device list. Use the values from

Table 2.A

Node Configuration Input and Output Sizes

for the input and output sizes. The

Configuration Assembly Instance = 6 and Configuration Size = 0.

Table 2.A Node Configuration Input and Output Sizes

Node Configured for:

Logic Command / Reference and Logic Status / Feedback only

Plus Datalink A

Plus Datalink B

Plus Datalink C

Plus Datalink D

Input Size

3

5

7

9

11

Output Size

2

4

6

8

10

The following data structures will be added to the ControlLogix processor for the communications with the 20-COMM-C module and drive.

2-14


Example:

Tag names

Outputs to the Drive - PowerFlex700S_02:O[0] … [9]

Inputs from the Drive - PowerFlex700S_02:I[0] … [10] word [0] reserved

Figure 2.3 Using Bits in ControlLogix is an example using Bits in the

ControlLogix processor to write to the output bits associated to parameter 158

[Drive Logic Rslt]

PowerFlex700S_02:O[0].0 -.9 map to parameter 158 [Drive Logic Rslt]

Figure 2.3 Using Bits in ControlLogix

PF700S_Start

PowerFlex700S_02:0.Data[0].1

PF700S_Normal_Stop

PF700S_Jog1



PF700S_Clear_Fault PowerFlex700S_02:0.Data[0].3


PF700S_UniPol_Fwd

PF700S_UniPol_Rev

PF700S_Jog2

PF700S_CurrLim_Stop

PF700S_Coast Stop






To use the 20-COMM-C with the PowerFlex® 700S, the 20-COMM-C must be v1.003 firmware or later.


2-15

The Logic Command and Logic Status are 32 bit data, but only the first 16 are used.

The bit definitions of the Logic Command word follow the same pattern as parameter 158 [Drive Logic Rslt]. The bit definitions of the Logic Status word follow the same pattern as bits 0-15 of parameter 155 [Logic Status].

Reference and Feedback are 16 bit unsigned integer data. Datalinks are 32 bit data.

Figure 2.4 ControlLogix I/O

shows I/O Image table for a ControlLogix system.

Figure 2.4 ControlLogix I/O

ControlNet

ControlLogix

Output Image

O.Data[0] DINT

0

O.Data[1] DINT

O.Data[2] DINT

O.Data[3] DINT

O.Data[4] DINT

O.Data[5] DINT

O.Data[6] DINT

O.Data[7] DINT

O.Data[8] DINT

O.Data[9] DINT

Adapter

Logic Cmd (16-

DPI

PowerFlex 700S

P707 Data In A1 Int

P708 Data In A1

P709 Data In A2 Int

P710 Data In A2

P711 Data In B1 Int

P712 Data In B1

P713 Data In B2 Int

P714 Data In B2

P715 Data In C1 Int

P716 Data In C1

P717 Data In C2 Int

P718 Data In C2

P719 Data In D1 Int

P720 Data In D1

P721 Data In D2 Int

P722 Data In D2

ControlNet

ControlLogix

Output Image

I.Data[1] DINT

I.Data[2] DINT

0

I.Data[3] DINT

I.Data[4] DINT

I.Data[5] DINT

I.Data[6] DINT

I.Data[7] DINT

I.Data[8] DINT

I.Data[9] DINT

I.Data[10] DINT

Adapter

Logic Status (16

CIP Generic Message

Source and Destination

Tags

Message

Buffer

DPI

PowerFlex 700S

P72

2

P707 Data In A1 Int

P708 Data In A1

P709 Data In A2 Int

P710 Data In A2

P711 Data In B1 Int

P712 Data In B1

P713 Data In B2 Int

P714 Data In B2

P715 Data In C1 Int

P716 Data In C1

P717 Data In C2 Int

P718 Data In C2

P719 Data In D1 Int

P720 Data In D1

P721 Data In D2 Int

P722 Data In D2

Message

Handler

1

2

Bits 0 - 15

Not affected by parameter 73 [Spd Fdbk Scale]

I.Data[0] is reserved

2-16


Parameter 723 [Dlink OutDataType] needs to be set for the type of data used. The most common will be Real Data (i.e. Current, Voltage, Torque are all Real Values in the drive). The PowerFlex® 700S drive default for this parameter is all Datalinks set for Integer values. If the check mark is not set then the datalink is not set for an

Integer value (From DriveExecutive).

ControlLogix Programming

To setup the PowerFlex® 700S drive to follow a speed reference from the

20-COMM-C, parameter 691 [DPI Ref Select] must be set to “Port 5.” Parameter

16 [Speed Ref Sel] must be set to “Speed Ref DPI.”

Reference and Feedback values are floating-point values in the PowerFlex 700S.

Use the following logic to transmit and receive reference and feedback data as unsigned integer data.

Reference to 700S

=

32767

Speed Reference Via ControlNet to a PowerFlex 700S using a 20-COMM-C module.

The first move instruction is only for visual indication of the speed reference.

MOV

Move

Source CNet_Ref_RPM

1200.0

Dest CNet_Ref_RPM

1200.0

Compute

CPT

Dest CNet_700S_Ref_Float

22114.959

Expression (CNet_Ref_RPM/Motor_Base_Speed)*Speed_Conversion_Constant

Move

MOV

Source CNet_Ref_Float

22114.959

Dest PowerFlex700S_02:0.Data(1)

22115


2-17

Feedback RPM

=

⁄

Convert Speed Feedback from 700S via 20-COMM-C

Feedback is returned as a 0 to 32767 number for 0 to Base Speed

Move

MOV

Source PowerFlex700S_02:1.Data[2]

22114.959

Dest CNet_700S_Fdbk_Float

34969.0

Compute

CPT

Dest CNet_700S_Fdbk

1897

Expression (CNet_700S_Fdbk_Float/Speed_Conversion_Constant)*Motor_Base_Speed

Datalinks Programming

In the ControlLogix system, Datalinks are transmitted over ControlNet as 32 bit integers (DINT). In order to send or receive floating point a COP (copy) instruction must be utilized. The copy instruction in ControlLogix performs a bitwise copy. Set the length of the copy instruction to a value appropriate for the destination data type. For example, when copying a DINT data type to a REAL data type, the length would be one since both data types contain 32 bits of data.

Figure 2.5 All Datalinks Selected is for all Datalinks selected.

Figure 2.5 All Datalinks Selected

Copy data from ControlLogix Processor to 20-COMM-C for 700S Data Links

COP

Copy File

Source

PF700_Float_Data[10]

Dest PowerFlex700S_02:O.Data[2]

Length 8

Copy data from 20-COMM-C to Floating Point data file.

Parameter 723 must be set to real data links on the 700S

COP

Copy File

Source

PowerFlex700S_02:I.Data[3]

Dest PF700_Float_Data[0]

Length 8

Explicit Messaging

When using explicit messaging in the ControlLogix system, the message type CIP

Generic is used. The data is transferred over ControlNet in the same data type as the parameter in the PowerFlex 700S. Make sure the data type for the Source and

2-18


Destination tags in your ControlLogix message instruction matches the data type in the PowerFlex 700S. Also, the Number of Elements in the ControlLogix message instruction must match the size of the Source data.

For example, to send an explicit message to write to parameter 12 [Speed Ref 2], which is a floating point:

1. The Source and Destination tags would be of type REAL.

2. The Number of Elements would be 4 bytes since a REAL data type takes up 4 bytes of data.

Copy Cat

For other types of messages refer to the 20-COMM-C user manual.

This feature allows you to upload a complete set of parameters to the LCD HIM.

This information can then be used as backup or can be transferred to another drive by downloading the memory. Generally, the transfer process manages all conflicts.

If a parameter from HIM memory does not exist in the target drive, the value stored is out of range for the drive, or the parameter cannot be downloaded because the drive is running, the download will stop and a text message will be issued. The user than has the option of completely stopping the download or continuing after noting the discrepancy for the parameter that could not be downloaded. These parameters can then be adjusted manually. The LCD HIM will store a number of parameter sets

(memory dependant) and each individual set can be named for clarity.

Current Limit

Datalinks


2-19

[Mtr Current Lim]

The following methods are available for a drive to use to protect itself from an overcurrent or overload condition.

• Instantaneous Over Current Trip - This is a feature that instantaneously trips or faults the drive if the output current exceeds this value. The value is fixed by hardware and is typically 250% of drive rated amps. This feature cannot be disabled.

• Software Over Current Trip - This is a configurable trip function. If parameter

377 [Inv OL Trip Cnfg] is set to Fault Coast to Stop, the drive will trip on inverter overload. This will occur when the Open Loop or Closed Loop IT function has detected an overload condition. See the

Drive Overload section for

a description of the Open Loop and Closed Loop IT functions.

• Software Current Limit - This feature selectively limits the current the drive will provide based on the several factors. The [Mtr Current Lim] parameter setting will limit the current to the user changeable level, range is 105% of

Motor Flux Current to 800% of the motor nameplate entered in 2 [Motor NP

FLA]. The Open Loop IT function can also limit the output current if the calculation determines it is in the overload area of operation. The Open Loop IT function and the Motor Current Limit parameters are routed to a minimum selection, the algebraic minimum of the inputs is used as the current limit. Also, the Closed Loop IT function can limit the current output by the drive. The

Closed Loop IT function and the Torque Current Reference are compared and the algebraic minimum is used for the Torque Current Reference. See the

Drive

Overload section for a description of the Open Loop and Closed Loop IT

Functions.

Datalinks are used to transfer I/O data from a communication adapter, i.e.

ControlNet (20-COMM-C), DeviceNet (20-COMM-D), to a controller. Datalinks allow parameter values to be changed without using messaging.

Configuring Datalinks

This section contains information on configuring the Datalink parameters for the

PowerFlex 700S. There are also parameters in the communication adapters that must be configured to use Datalinks. Refer to the

ControlNet (20-COMM-C) and

DeviceNet (20-COMM-D)

sections for more information.

“Data In” Parameters

[Data In x Int] and [Data In x Real] parameters are inputs to the drive from the controller and are used to write to parameters. A total of 8 parameters can be written with the “Data In” parameters. In the 700S, each parameter is either a 16 bit integer, a 32 bit integer or a 32 bit floating point (real). This means the datalinks parameters are 32 bits.

To write to a 16 bit or 32 bit integer parameter, that parameter must be linked to one of the [Data In x Int] parameters.

To write to a real parameter, that parameter must be linked to one of the [Data In x

Real] parameters.

2-20



Writing an Integer parameter using a Datalink:

• 740 [Position Control] is linked to 707 [Data In A1 Int]

The value that is sent to [Data In A1 Int] from the controller will show up in

[Postion Control]. [Data In A1 Int] is used because [Position Control] is an integer parameter.


Writing a Real Parameter using a Datalink:

• 111 [Torque Ref 1] is linked to 708 [Data In A1 Real]

The value that is sent to [Data In A1 Real] from the controller will show up in

[Torque Ref 1]. [Data In A1 Real] is used because [Torque Ref 1] is a real integer parameter.

“Data Out” Parameters

[Data Out x Int] and [Data Out x Real] parameters are outputs from the drive to the controller and are used to read parameters. A total of 8 parameters can be read with the “Data Out” parameters. In the 700S, each parameter is either a 32 bit integer or a 32 bit floating point (real). This means that the datalink parameters are 32 bits.

Parameter 723 [Dlink OutDataTyp] is used to select whether each of the 8 “Data

Out” data is an integer or real.

To read a 16 bit or 32 bit integer parameter, one of the [Data Out x Int] parameters must be linked to the desired integer parameter. Then the bit corresponding to the

[Data In x Int] parameter in [Dlink OutDataType] is set to 0.

To read to a real parameter, one of the [Data Out x Real] parameters must be linked to the desired real parameter. Then bit corresponding to the [Data Out x Real] parameter in [Dlink OutData Type] is set to 1.


Reading an Integer Parameter Using a Datalink

• 724 [Data Out A1 Int] is linked to 741 [Position Status]

• 723 [Dlink OutData Type] bit 0 is set to 0

The value from [Data Out A1 Int] to the controller contains the value of

[Position Status]. [Data Out A1 Int] is used and [Dlink OutDataType] bit 0 is set to 0 because [Position Status] is an integer parameter.


Reading a Real Parameter using a Datalink

• [Data Out A1 Real] is linked to [Output Current]

• [Dlink OutDataType] bit 1 is set to 1

The value from [Data Out A1 Real] to the controller contains the value of

[Output Current]. [Data Out A1 Real] is used and [Dlink OutDataType] bit 0 is set to 1 because [Output Current] is a real parameter.

Decel Time


2-21

Parameter 33 [Decel Time] sets the rate at which the drive ramps down its output during a ramp Stop command or during a decrease in commanded speed.

The rate established is the result of the programmed Decel Time and the programmed motor rated speed parameter 4 [Motor NP RPM] as follows:

Motor RPM (Parameter 4)

Decel Time (Parameter 33)

=

Decel Rate (RPM/sec)

Times are adjustable in 0.0001 second increments from 0.01 to 6553.5 seconds.

DeviceNet (20-COMM-D)

This serves as a supplement to the PowerFlex® DeviceNet Adapter Users Manual, publication 20COMM-UM002, addressing items specific to the PowerFlex 700S.

Please refer to the user manual for details on 20-COMM-D set-up, configuration, I/

O messaging, and Eing.


The 20-COMM-D device must be v1.005 firmware or later in order to be used with the PowerFlex 700S.

The Logic Command and Logic Status are 16 bits plus a 16 bit pad word for a total of 32 bit data. The bit definitions of the Logic Command word follow the same pattern as parameter 158 [Drive Logic Rslt]. The bit definitions of the Logic Status word follow the same pattern as bits 0-15 of parameter 155 [Logic Status].

Reference, Feedback, and Datalinks are 32 bit data. This means with just the Logic

Command/Status and Speed Ref/Fdbk I/O enabled, the 20-COMM-D would map 8 bytes of I/O in the DeviceNet Scanner. With the Logic Command/Status, Speed

Ref/Fdbk and all of the Datalinks enabled, the 20-COMM-D would have a total of

40 bytes of I/O mapped in the DeviceNet scanner. The I/O Image table for a

ControlLogix system is shown.

DeviceNet

DPI

ControlLogix

Output Image

O.Data[0] DINT

O.Data[1] DINT

O.Data[2] DINT

O.Data[3] DINT

O.Data[4] DINT

O.Data[5] DINT

O.Data[6] DINT

O.Data[7] DINT

O.Data[8] DINT

O.Data[9] DINT

Adapter

2 Reference

3 Reference

PowerFlex 700S

P707 Data In A1 Int

P708 Data In A1

P709 Data In A2 Int

P710 Data In A2

P711 Data In B1 Int

P712 Data In B1

713 Data In B2 Int

P714 Data In B2

P715 Data In C1 Int

P716 Data In C1

P717 Data In C2 Int

P718 Data In C2

P719 Data In D1 Int

P720 Data In D1

P721 Data In D2 Int

P722 Data In D2

1

The speed reference comes into the 20-COMM-D as a double integer. The PowerFlex® 700S firmware automatically converts that speed reference into floating point, so that parameter 20 [Speed Ref DPI] is a floating-point value.

2-22


DeviceNet

DPI

ControlLogix

Adapter

PowerFlex 700S

Input Image

I.Data[0] DINT

I.Data[1] DINT

I.Data[2] DINT

I.Data[3] DINT

I.Data[4] DINT

I.Data[5] DINT

I.Data[6] DINT

I.Data[7] DINT

I.Data[8] DINT

I.Data[9] DINT

3 Feedback

P155

1

Logic Status

2

P72 Speed Ref DPI

P724 Data Out A1

P725 Data Out A1

P726 Data Out A2

P727 Data Out A2

P728 Data Out B1

P729 Data Out B1

P730 Data Out B2

P731 Data Out B2

P732 Data Out C1

P733 Data Out C1

P734 Data Out C2

P735 Data Out C2

P736 Data Out D1

P737 Data Out D1

P738 Data Out D2

P739 Data Out D2

CIP Generic Message

Source and Destination

Tags

Message

Buffer

Message

Handler

1

2

Bits 0-15 only of parameter 155 [Logic Status] appear in the Input Image table of the ControlLogix controller.

The speed feedback sent from the PowerFlex® 700S to the 20-COMM-D is not affected by parameter 73 [Spd

Fdbk Scale]. Furthermore, the PowerFlex 700S automatically coverts parameter 72 [Scaled Spd Fdbk], which is a floating-point parameter, to a double integer before the value is transferred to the 20-COMM-D.

To setup the PowerFlex 700S to follow a speed reference from the 20-COMM-D,

Parameter 691 [DPI Ref Select] must be set to “Port 5.” Parameter 16 [Speed Ref

Sel] must be set to “Speed Ref DPI.”


Use the following logic to transmit and receive reference and feedback data as integer data.

Transmitted Reference

=

Base Motor RPM

Floating point Feedback (RPM)

=

32768

In the ControlLogix system, Datalinks are transmitted over DeviceNet as 32 bit integers (DINT). In order to send or receive floating point a COP (copy) instruction must be used. The copy instruction in ControlLogix performs a bitwise copy. Set the length of the copy instruction to a value appropriate for the destination data type. For example, when copying a DINT data type to a REAL data type, the length would be one (1) since both data types contain 32 bits of data.

When using explicit messaging in the ControlLogix system, the message type CIP

Generic is used. The data is transferred over DeviceNet in the same data type as the parameter in the PowerFlex 700S. Make sure that the data type for the Source and

Destination tags in your ControlLogix message instruction matches the data type in the PowerFlex 700S. Also, the Number of Elements in the ControlLogix message instruction must match the size of the Source data. For example, to send an explicit message to write to parameter12 [Speed Ref 2], which is floating point:

1. The Source and Destination tags would be type REAL.

2. The Number of Elements would be 4 bytes since a REAL data type takes up 4 bytes of data.


2-23

SLC/PLC-5 System

Reference/Feedback Programming

The reference is scaled so that base motor speed = 32768. The SLC/PLC-5 does not use DINT, and only handles 16 bit integers, so the reference has to be handled differently to account for references above 32767 or below -32768. The example on the following page shows how to transmit references less than twice base motor speed.

2-24


\

The feedback is also scaled so that base motor speed = 32768. The SLC/PLC-5 does not use DINT, and only handles 16 bit integers, so the feedback has to be handled differently to account for references above 32767 or below -32768. The following example shows how to read feedback values less than twice base motor speed.

Datalink Programming

Datalinks are transmitted and received through block transfer I/O. The SLC/PLC-5 is limited to 16 bit integers and floating point. Because the SLC/PLC-5 does not support 32-bit integers, 32-bit integer datalinks remain split into (2) 16 bit integers.

In order to send or receive floating-point datalinks the LSW and MSW must be swapped and the COP (copy) instruction must be utilized. The following examples are for transmitting and receiving the floating-point Datalinks.

Reading Floating-Point Datalink in a SLC/PLC-5


2-25

Writing Floating-Point Block Datalinks in a SLC/PLC-5

Explicit Messaging

Explicit messaging is used to configure the drive and monitor data from the drive.

Chapter 6 of the 20-COMM-D User Manual shows the format of the explicit message request and response data in an SLC and PLC-5.

Because the SLC/PLC-5 does not support 32-bit integers, 32-bit integer data from the explicit message request and response data remains split into (2) 16 bit integers.

In order to send or receive floating-point data the Least Significant Word (LSW) and Most Significant Word (MSW) must be swapped and the COP (copy) instruction must be utilized. The following examples are for transmitting and receiving floating-point data for explicit messages.

2-26


Reading Floating-Point Explicit Message Data in an SLC/PLC-5

Writing Floating-Point Explicit Message Data in an SLC/PLC-5

Digital Inputs


There are 4 digital inputs on the I/O board. One of the inputs is dedicated for the

Enable and cannot be configured. The other 3 inputs can be configured. Digital

Input 1 is 24VDC and Digital Inputs 2 and 3 can accept a 12-24VDC signal. There is a 24VDC power supply on the I/O board to supply power for those inputs.

Digital Inputs 2 and 3 are high speed digital inputs with a maximum input frequency of 350 kHz.


2-27

Digital Input Configuration

24 VDC

TB1-T10

TB1-T11

24 VDC Common

TB1-T9

{Logic Common}

TB1-T8

TB1-T7

829

DigIn 1 Debounce

Debounce

{Return "Common"}

TB1-T5

TB1-T6

Port0 Regis

Cnfg

(Ext Filt 0)

(Ext Filt 1)

236

236

(Ext Filt 2)

(Ext Filt 3)

236

236

08

09

10

11

{Return "Common"}

TB1-T3

TB1-T4

Port0 Regis

Cnfg

(Ext Filt 0)

(Ext Filt 1)

246 08

246 09

(Ext Filt 2)

(Ext Filt 3)

246

246

10

11

825

En In Debounce

Debounce

SyncLink

Bit Filter

833

DigIn 2 Debounce

SyncLink

Bit Filter

837

DigIn 3 Debounce

Debounce

Debounce

824 00

Local I/O Status

(Enable In)

DigIn 1 Sel

838

824 01 824 01

Local I/O Status

(DigIn 1)

Selector

DigIn1 Data

DigIn1 Bit

826

827

DigIn 2 Sel

840

824 02 824 02

Local I/O Status

(DigIn 2)

Selector

DigIn2 Data

DigIn2 Bit

830

831

DigIn 3 Sel

840

824 03

824 03

Selector

DigIn3 Data

DigIn3 Bit

834

835

Bit

Combine

Selections per Par 839

Bit

Combine

Selections per Par 840

Bit

Combine

DigIn1 User Data

828

DigIn2 User Data

836

DigIn3 User Data

836

[DigIn 1 Sel] can be set to the following values:

5

6

3

4

7

1

2

Value Description

0 Not Used

Normal Stop

Start

Run

Clear Faults

Stop - CF

Jog 1

Jog 2

11

12

13

14

Value

8

9

10

Description

Fwd/Reverse

Cur Lim Stop

Coast Stop

Aux Fault

Aux Fault Inv

User Select

Precharge/Disc


11

12

13

7

8

9

10

5

6

3

4

1

2


0 “Not Used”

“Enable”

“Clear Faults”

“Ext Fault”

“Norm Stop-CF”

“Start”

“Reverse”

“Run”

“Fwd/Reverse”

“CurLim Stop”

“Jog 1”

“Aux Fault”

“AuxFault Inv”

“Jog 2”

31

32

33

22

26

29

30

17

18

19

21


14 “Normal Stop”

15

16

“Spd Ref Sel1”

“Spd Ref Sel2”

“Spd Ref Sel3”

“CurLim Stop”

“Coast Stop”

“BscIndx Step”

“BscIndxStpRv”

“PI Trim En”

“Trend Trig”

“PreCharge En”

“Regis 1 Ltch”

“+Hrd OvrTrvl”

“-Hrd OvrTrvl”

2-28



5

6

3

4

7

8

1

2


0 “Not Used”

“Normal Stop”

“Start”

“Run”

“Clear Faults”

“Stop-CF”

“Jog 1”

“Jog 2”

“Fwd/Reverse”

12

13

23

24

25


9 “CurLim Stop”

10

11

“Coast Stop”

“Aux Fault”

“AuxFault Inv”

“User Select”

“Logix Motion”

“+Hrd OvrTrvl”

“-Hrd OvrTrvl”

[DigIn x Debounce] sets a delay time to allow any bounce in the digital input to settle out. This parameter has a range of 0 to 15.5 milliseconds.

When [DigIn x Sel] is set to “User Select,” the function of the digital input is determined by the following:

• [DigIn x Data] determines any bits that should be permanently set. [DigIn x

Data] sets the value of [DigIn x User Data] except for the bit chose in [DigIn x

Bit]

• [DigIn x Data] determines the bit you wish to toggle based on whether the digital input is on or off

• [DigIn x User Data] will have the same bits that are set in [DigIn x Data]. Then the bit that was chosen in [Digin x Bit] will toggle based on whether the digital input is on or off. A designation (sink) parameter is then linked to [DigIn x User

Data] so that it determines the value of that sink parameter

Configuration Example

DigIn 1 will be setup to determine the value of [Speed Ref Sel]. DigIn 1 will toggle

[Speed Ref Sel] between a value of 1 “Speed Ref 1” and 5 “Speed Ref 5.”

• [DigIn 1 Sel] = “User Select”

• [DigIn 1 Data] = 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0001

• [DigIn 1 Bit] = 2. This means when we toggle Digital Input 1, bit 2 of [DigIn 1

User Data] will toggle.

When Digital Input 1 is off [DigIn 1 User Data] will be equal to [DigIn 1 Data]. In other words, [DigIn 1 User Data] will equal 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000

0001 (a value of 1).

When Digital Input 1 is on [DigIn 1 User Data] will be equal to [DigIn 1 Data] plus whatever bit was set in [DigIn 1 Bit]. In other words [DigIn 1 User Data] will equal

0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0101 (a value of 5).

[Speed Ref Sel] is linked to [DigIn 1 User Data]. Now [Speed Ref Sel] will toggle between a value of 1 and 5.

Digital Outputs


2-29

Digital Input Status Bits

[Local I/O Status], bits 0-4 give the status of the digital inputs and can be used for troubleshooting the digital inputs. The bits are broken down as follows:

• Bit 0 - “Enable Input”

• Bit 1 - “Digital Input 1”



When the bit in [Local I/O Status] associated with the digital input is on, this means the PowerFlex® 700S sees that the digital input is on. When the bit associated with the digital input is off, this means the PowerFlex 700S sees the digital input is off.


There are 3 digital outputs on the I/O board.

Digital Outputs 1 and 2 are 24VDC open collector (sinking logic). They are rated

25mA maximum.

Figure 2.6

is an example of how Digital Outputs 1 and 2 would

be used with a light.

Note:

The transistor in the diagram is the internal circuitry of the Digital

Output. When the logic for Digital Output 1 becomes true, the transistor turns on, tying the transistor's collector to ground and completing the circuit. Then the light will turn on.

Figure 2.6 Digital Outputs

Sinking

Ouput

T6 G

+ 24V DC

Digital

Output

Logic

Digital

Output

Common

(Return)

T4

Digital Output 3 is a relay output rated for 24VDC. The relay output is rated 5A @

24VDC for a resistive load, and 2A @ 24VDC for an inductive load.

2-30


Digital Output Configuration

824

16

Local I/O Status

(Output Relay)

Relay Out Data

Relay Out Bit

841

842

TB2-B5

TB2-B4

824

17

Local I/O Status

(Aux Out 1)

Dig Out 1 Data

Data Out 1 Bit

843

844

TB1-T6

TB1-T5

TB1-T4

{Return "Common"}

824

18

Local I/O Status

(Aux Out 2)

Dig Out 2 Data

Data Out 2 Bit

845

846

The [Relay x Data] parameter and [Dig Out x Data] parameters are linked to a parameter used to turn on the digital output.

The [Relay x Bit] parameter and [Dig Out x Bit] parameters select which bit of the data you wish to use to turn on the digital output.

Configuration Example

This example configures Digital Output 1 for “Enabled.” “Enabled” indicates the inverter section of the drive is active (IGBTs switching).

• [Dig Out 1 Data] is linked to [Logic Status]

• [Dig Out 1 Bit] is set to 0

When the “Enabled” bit of [Logic Status] turns on, Digital Output 1 turns on.

Digital Output Status Bits

[Local I/O Status], bits 16-18 give the status of the digital outputs and can be used for troubleshooting the digital outputs. The bits are broken down as follows:

• Bit 16 - “Digital Output 3” (Output Relay)

• Bit 17 - “Digital Output 1” (Aux Out 1)

• Bit 18 - “Digital Output 2” (Aux Out 2)

When the bit in [Local I/O Status] associated with the digital output is on, this means that the logic in the PowerFlex 700S is telling that digital output to turn on.

When the bit associated with the digital output is off, this means that the logic in the

PowerFlex 700S is telling that digital output to turn off.

Direction Control and

Bipolar Reference


2-31

The direction of rotation of the motor can be controlled by a forward/reverse command or by the use of a bipolar signal. Parameter 153 [Control Options] bit 0 -

"Bipolar Sref" selects this option.

When this bit is enabled (1) a bipolar speed reference is used. In bipolar reference mode, Par 40 [Selected Spd Ref] indicates both the speed magnitude and the direction: Positive speed reference values (+) = forward direction and negative speed reference values (–) = reverse direction. When this bit is disabled a unipolar speed reference is used. In unipolar mode, the speed reference is limited to a minimum value of zero (0), shown by the Max selection block (as shown in the diagram below). In this case Par 40 [Selected Spd Ref] supplies only the speed magnitude. The direction is determined by Par 153 [Applied LogicCmd] bits 20

“UniPol Fwd” and 21 “UniPol Rev”. The forward/reverse direction button on the

HIM is one possible source for the [Applied Logic Command] direction bits. The following chart explains the effect that the direction button on the HIM has based on the condition of the “Bipolar SRef” bit:

Bipolar Reference Controlled By HIM? HIM Direction Button

Enabled Yes Changes the motor direction due to a HIM supplied (+) or (-) command signal.

Enabled No

Disabled Yes

Has no effect on motor direction. Direction determined by sign of Par 40 [Selected SpdRef].

Changes the motor direction due to a HIM supplied forward or reverse [Applied LogicCmd] bit.

Disabled No Changes the motor direction due to a HIM supplied forward or reverse [Applied LogicCmd] bit.

In either Bipolar or Unipolar mode, the selected direction can be determined from the sign of Par 41 [Limited Spd Ref]. Positive values indicate forward rotation and negative values indicate reverse rotation.

Selected Spd Ref

40

Control Options 153 00

1

(Unipol Fwd) +1

Applied Logic Cmd

152 20

0

152 21

Max

1

(Unipol Rev) -1

1

X

0

Drive Peripheral Interface

(DPI)

DPI is an enhancement to SCANport that provides more functions and better performance. SCANport was a CAN based, Master-Slave protocol, created to provide a standard way of connecting motor control products and optional peripheral devices together. It allows multiple (up to 6) devices to communicate with a motor control product without requiring configuration of the peripheral.

SCANport and DPI both provide two basic message types called Client/Server (C/

S) and Producer/Consumer (P/C). C/S messages are used to transfer parameter and configuration information in the background (relative to other message types). P/C messages are used for control and status information. DPI adds a higher baud rate, brand specific enabling, Peer-to-Peer (P/P) communication, and Flash Memory

2-32

Detailed Drive Operation programming support. This communication interface is the primary way to interact with, and control the drive.

!

ATTENTION:

• The PowerFlex

®

700S only supports the DPI communication protocol.

• The PowerFlex 700S will not communicate with SCANport devices.

• The PowerFlex 700S does not support LED HIMs.

Client/Server

C/S messages operate in the background (relative to other message types) and are used for non-control purposes. The C/S messages are based on a 10ms “ping” event that allows peripherals to perform a single transaction (i.e. one C/S transaction per peripheral per time period). Message fragmentation (because the message transaction is larger than the standard CAN message of eight data bytes) is automatically handled by C/S operation. The following types of messaging are covered:

• Logging in peripheral devices

• Read/Write of parameter values

• Access to all parameter information (limits, scaling, default, etc.)

• User set access

• Fault/Alarm queue access

• Event notification (fault, alarm, etc.)

• Access to all drive classes/objects (e.g. Device, Peripheral, Parameter, etc.)

Producer/Consumer Operation Overview

P/C messages operate at a higher priority than C/S messages and are used to control/report the operation of the drive (e.g. start, stop, etc.). A P/C status message is transmitted every 5ms (by the drive) and a command message is received from every change of state in any attached DPI peripheral. Change of state is a button being pressed or error detected by a DPI peripheral. P/C messages are of a fixed size, so support of message fragmentation is not required. The following types of messaging are covered:

• Drive status (running, faulted, etc.)

• Drive commands (start, stop, etc.)

• Control logic parsing operations (e.g., mask and owner parameters)

• Entering Flash programming mode

• “Soft” login and logout of peripheral devices (enabling/disabling of peripheral control)

Peer-to-Peer Operation

Peer-to-Peer messaging allows two devices to communicate directly rather than through the master or host (i.e. drive). They are the same priority as C/S messages and will occur in the background. If an LCD HIM is attached to the PowerFlex

®

700S drive, it will be able to directly request off-board parameters using

Peer-to-Peer messages (i.e. no proxy support needed in the drive). PowerFlex 700S drives can use all six communication ports because Peer-to-Peer proxy operations

DriveLogix


2-33

are not needed. All Peer-to-Peer operations occur without any intervention from the user (regardless whether proxy or normal P/P operation), no setup is required. No

Peer-to-Peer proxy operations are required while the drive is in Flash mode.

All the timing requirements specified in the DPI system, Control, and Messaging specifications are supported. Peripheral devices will be scanned (“pinged”) at a

10ms rate. Drive status messages will be produced at a 5ms rate, while peripheral command messages will be accepted (by the drive) as they occur (i.e. change of state). Based on these timings, the following worst case conditions can occur

(independent of the baud rate and protocol):

• Change of peripheral state (e.g. Start, Stop, etc.) to change in the drive - 10ms

• Change in reference value to change in drive operation - 10ms

• Change in Datalink data value to change in the drive - 10ms

• Change of parameter value into drive - 20ms times the number of attached peripherals

The maximum time to detect the loss of communication from a peripheral device is

500ms.

The following timing specifications apply to DPI devices:

• Host status messages only go out to peripherals once they log in and at least every 125ms (to all attached peripherals). Periphals will time-out if more than

250ms passes without a response. Actual time is dependent on the number of peripherals attached. The minimum time goal is 5ms (may have to be dependent on the Port Baud Rate). DPI allows a minimum 5ms status at 125k and

1ms status at 500k.

• The host determines the Minimum Update Time (MUT) based on the number of attached peripherals. Range of values from 2 to 125ms. Minimum goal time of 5ms. DPI allows 2ms at 500k and 5ms minimum at 125k.

• Peripheral command messages (including Datalinks) generated on change-of-state, but not faster than Host MUT and at least every 250ms. Host will time out if it is more then 500ms.

• Peer messages requests cannot be sent any faster than 2x of MUT.

• Host must ping every port at least every 2 seconds. Peripherals time if more then 3 seconds pass. Host will wait a maximum of 10ms (125k) or 5ms (500k) for peripheral response to ping. Peripherals typical response time is 1ms.

Periphals allow only one pending explicit message (i.e. ping response or peer request) at a time.

• Response to an explicit request or fragment must occur within 1 second or device will time out (applies to Host or Peripheral). Time-out implies retry from beginning. Maximum number of fragments per transaction is 16. Flash memory is exception with 22 fragments allowed.

• During Flash mode, host stops ping, but still supports status/command messages at a 1-5 second rate. drive will use 1 second rate. Data transfer occurs via explicit message as fast as possible (i.e. peripheral request, host response, peripheral request, etc.) but only between two devices.

The MUT, is based on the message type only. A standard command and Datalink command could be transmitted from the same peripheral faster than the MUT and still be O.K. However, two successive Datalink commands will have to be separated by the MUT.

See the DriveLogix Controller User Manual, publication 20D-UM002.

2-34


Drive Overload

Theory of Operation

The following discussion assumes that the IT curve does not change with Pulse

Width Modulated (PWM) carrier frequency or drive output frequency.

A drive has three rated current values; a continuous current rating, a 1-minute current rating, and a 3-second current rating. Typically, the 1-minute rating will be close to 110% of the continuous rating, and the 3-second rating will be close to

150% of the continuous rating. This may vary from drive to drive to optimize the performance of each frame size. In the following examples the 1-minute rating is

110% and the 3-second rating is 150%.

Open Loop Current Limit

The drive can thermally allow 102.5%.

The 1-minute current rating assumes a duty cycle of 1 minute on, followed by 3 minutes at 100%. This results in an average current of 102.5%.

110% * 60 sec + 100%*180 sec average current = ------------------------------------------- = 102.5%

The 3-second current rating assumes a duty cycle of 3 seconds on, followed by 57 seconds at 100%. This results in an average current of 102.5%.

150% * 3 sec + 100%*57 sec average current = ------------------------------------------- = 102.5%

Typically the drive will have a sixty-second rating of 110% of continuous current and a three-second rating at 150% of the continuous current. Under normal operating conditions, the open loop function sets this current limit to the short term

(three-second) rating. If the function detects an overload, it lowers the limit to the continuous level. If the function is in the continuous level limit, this can be lower than the Motor Current limit. After a period of time (typically one to three minutes), the function returns the limit to the short term rating.

Closed Loop IT Function

The drive will also adjust the Torque Current limit level based on the values in

Parameter 358 [Iq Ref Limited], parameter 313 [Heatsink Temp] and the thermal characteristics of the drive contained in the power EE memory. Under normal operating conditions, the function typically sets the limit at 250% of the continuous drive rating. If the function determines that the power device junction temperature is approaching maximum, it will reduce this limit to the level required to prevent additional heating of the inverter. This level could be as low as the continuous rating of the drive output amps. If the inverter temperature decreases, the function will raise the limit to a higher level.

Drive Over Temperature

(Frame 9 Only)


2-35

Drive Overload Status

Drive Overload Status can be monitored in parameter 346 [Drive OL Status].

• Bit 0 [NTC Shorted] indicates the Negative Temperature Coefficient (NTC) device has a short circuit.

• Bit 1 [NTC Open] indicates the NTC has an open circuit.

• Bit 2 [HS OverTemp] indicates heatsink temperature is above: 105° C for ratings 1.1-11.0A, 115° C for 14-34A, 100 °C for 40-52A.

• Bit 3 [HS Pending] indicates heatsink temperature is above: 95° C for ratings

1.1 -11A, 105° C for 14- 34A, 90° C for 40- 52A.

• Bit 4 [IT Trip] indicates the drive has exceed the 3 second rating of either the

150% normal duty rating or 200% of the heavy duty rating.

• Bit 5 [IT Pending] indicates the drive OL integrator is at 50% of the time out time.

• Bit 6 [IT Foldback] indicates the drive closed loop current limit is in a fold back condition. The value of the fold back is proportional to the calculated junction temperature.

• Bit 7 [Jnc Over Temp] indicates the junction temperature has exceeded the maximum temperature for the power semiconductor device.

The drive over temperature is 90º C. The fault is detected if the heat-sink temperature, parameter 313 [Heatsink Temp] or parameter 345 [Drive OL

JnctTmp] exceeds 90º C.

The open loop current limit is originally designed for 25% of the duty cycle at

110% output current. On the other side, the High Horsepower drive allows 10% of duty cycle at 110% output current. The open loop current limit function can not protect the drive over temperature fault.

Droop

Droop is used to "shed" load and is usually used when a soft coupling of two motors is present in an application. The master drive speed regulates and the follower uses droop so it does not "fight" the master. The input to the droop block comes from the torque output of the speed regulator before limiting. The output of the droop block reduces the speed reference. Parameter 86 [Spd Reg Droop] sets the amount of base motor speed that the speed reference is reduced when at full load torque. [Spd Reg Droop] is in units of per unit torque/per unit speed. For example, when [Spd Reg Droop] is set to 0.1 and the drive is running at 100% rated motor torque, the droop block would subtract 10% from the speed reference.

Droop

Spd Reg Droop 86

2-36


Dynamic Braking

Efficiency

See

Bus Regulation/Braking .

This module contains a second order thermal model of the internal. For resistor sizing, refer to the PowerFlex® Dynamic Braking Resistor Calculator Selection

Guide, publication PFLEX-AT001. This publication is available online at: http://literature.rockwellautomation.com/literature

The following chart shows typical efficiency for PWM variable frequency drives, regardless of size. Drives are most efficient at full load and full speed.

100

95

90

85

80

75 vs. Speed vs. Load

10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100

% Speed/% Load

Electronic Gearing

CE Conformity

See

Position Loop - Follower (Electronic Gearing)

Conformity with the Low Voltage (LV) Directive and Electromagnetic

Compatibility (EMC) Directive has been demonstrated using harmonized European

Norm (EN) standards published in the Official Journal of the European

Communities. PowerFlex® drives comply with the EN standards listed below when installed according to the User and Reference Manual.

Declarations of Conformity are available online at:

http://www.ab.com/certification

Low Voltage Directive (73/23/EEC)

• EN50178 Electronic equipment for use in power installations.

• EN60204-1 Safety of machinery - Electrical equipment of machines.

EMC Directive (89/336/EEC)

EN61800-3 Adjustable speed electrical power drive systems Part 3: EMC product standard including specific test methods.


2-37

General Notes

• If the adhesive label is removed from the top of the drive, the drive must be installed in an enclosure with side openings less than 12.5 mm (0.5 in.) and top openings less than 1.0 mm (0.04 in.) to maintain compliance with the LV

Directive.

• The motor cable should be kept as short as possible in order to avoid electromagnetic emission as well as capacitive currents.

• Use of line filters in ungrounded systems is not recommended.

• PowerFlex® drives may cause radio frequency interference if used in a residential or domestic environment. The user is required to take measures to prevent interference, in addition to the essential requirements for CE compliance listed below, if necessary.

• Conformity of the drive with CE EMC requirements does not guarantee an entire machine or installation complies with CE EMC requirements. Many factors can influence total machine/installation compliance.

Essential Requirements for CE Compliance

Conditions 1-6 listed below must be satisfied for PowerFlex drives to meet the requirements of EN61800-3.

1. Standard PowerFlex 700S CE compatible drive.

2. Review important precautions/attentions statements throughout this document and the PowerFlex 700S User Manual, publication 20D-UM001 before installing drive.

3. Grounding as described on page 1-4 of the user manual.

4. Output power, control (I/O) and signal wiring must be braided, shield cable with a coverage of 75% or better, metal conduit or equivalent attention.

5. All shielded cables should terminate with proper shielded connector.

6. Conditions in

Table 2.B PowerFlex 700S EN61800-3 EMC Compatibility(1) .

Table 2.B PowerFlex 700S EN61800-3 EMC Compatibility

(1)

1 - 6

Second Environment

Restrict Motor Cable to 30 m (98 ft.)

Any Drive and Option

✔

First Environment Restricted Distribution

Restrict Motor Cable to 150 m (492 ft.)

Any Drive and Option External Filter Required

✔ ✔

(1) External filters for First Environment installations and increasing motor cable lengths in Second Environment installations are available. Roxburgh models KMFA (RF3 for UL installations) and MIF or Schaffner FN3258 and FN258 models are recommended. Refer to http://www.deltron-emcon.com and http://www.mtecorp.com

(USA) or http://www.schaffner.com, respectively.

2-38


Faults

Filters

Faults occur due to conditions within and/or outside the drive that could affect drive operation or application operation. These events or conditions are considered to be of significant magnitude that drive operation should or must be discontinued. Faults are brought to the user’s attention via the HIM, communications and/or contact outputs. Faults are selected during commissioning of the drive. Example of faults include: Encoder loss, communication loss or other exceptions within the drive.

Configuration:

Parameters 365 [Fdbk LsCnfg Pri] through 394 [VoltFdbkLossCnfg] and parameters 940 [+Sft OvrTrvlCnfg] through 944 [Positin Err Cnfg] program the response of the drive to various conditions. Responses include Ignore, Alarm, Fault

Coast Stop, Fault Ramp Stop, and Fault Current Limit Stop.

Parameters 323 [Fault Status 1] through 325 [Fault Status 3] indicated any faults that are active.

Application Example:

Parameter 371 [Mtr OL Trip Cnfg] is set to a value of 2 "FltCoastStop". This configures the drive to set the fault bit, parameter 323 [Fault Status 1] bit 10 "Mtr

OL Trip" when the motor overload trip event occurs.

The PowerFlex 700s has various filters used to assist tuning of the drive. The following section will assist the user in using the filter using frequency and time domain analysis.

Key Words

Frequency response, radians, filter, notch,

Nomenclature:

Symbol

s

ω

ω co

Description of Symbol

Laplace Operator

Frequency

Cut-off Frequency

Units

radians/sec radians/sec

Low Pass Filter

A low pass filter is designed to pass low frequencies and attenuate high frequencies.

The break point between high and low is called the cut off frequency.

Figure 2.7 Bode Plot Low Pass Filter (

ω

co

= 10 rad/sec)


2-39

The Process Control Loop has a low pass filter immediately after the error signal.

The break frequency is set by parameter 184 [PI Lpass Filt BW]. The filter is used to eliminate unwanted noise in the feedback. Typical range is between 10 rad/sec to

50 rad/sec.

Second Order Low Pass Filter

A second order low pass filter is similar to a low pass filter, however the magnitude rolls off twice as fast as a first order low pass filter. Also the phase shift of a second order filter is from 0 to 180º compared to 0 to 90º of a first order filter.

Figure 2.8 Second Order Low Pass Filter

There is a second order low pass filter in the Speed Control-Regulator. This filter is located after the speed error signal. The break frequency is set by parameter 89

[Spd Err Filt BW]. The break frequency is set to five times (5x) the Speed Loop

Bandwidth. This filter is used to attenuate any high frequency noise that the speed loop would not be able to control.

2-40


Lead-Lag Filter

The PowerFlex® 700S incorporates a generic lead lag filter. The filter has the following Laplace transfer function:

Kn is the gain term for the filter and Wn is the frequency term for the filter.

Lead-Lag Filter "lag"

When Kn is less than one (Kn<1) the filter behaves like a low pass filter.

Figure 2.9 Kn < 1 “Lag Filter”

Figure 2.9

shows the lead lag in a "lag configuration.” The unique aspect of this filter is that the gain stops once the input frequency is equal to Wn/Kn. Another aspect to this filter is that there is a mild phase shift during the attenuation.

Figure 2.10

shows the bode plot of the lag configuration. Kn is set to 0.7 and Wn is

set to 35 rad/sec. The time domain shows a 100 rad/sec sinusoidal input. Notice that the phase shift between input and output are marginal.

Figure 2.10 Bode Plot and Time Domain of Lag


2-41

The lag configuration is good for eliminating unwanted noise and disturbance such as backlash. There are two lead-lag blocks used in the speed regulator loop. One is in the forward path and the other is in the feedback path.

Forward Path

Feedback Path

Kn Wn

Parameter 95 [SRegOut FiltGain] Parameter 96 [SReg Out Filt BW]

Parameter 93 [SRegFB Filt Gain] Parameter 94 [SReg FB Filt BW]

For moderate filtering:

Set Kn=0.7, Wn=0.35

For Heavy filtering:

Set Kn=0.5, Wn=20

Both the Forward and Feedback filters can be set to the same value to increase their effectiveness.

Lead-Lag Filter "Lead"

When Kn is greater than one (Kn>1), the lead-lag filter operates as lead filter. The original equation is re-written into a term that can be used to utilize the lead function. Wn is divided throughout the equation. Two new terms are developed.

The lead term (Wld) is used to display the lead of the filter. The lag term (Wlg) is used to show the lag of the filter.

Figure 2.11 Kn > 1 “Lead Filter”

Kn s wn 1

⁄ )

)

s Wld 1

(

(

s Wlg 1

)

)

wn

=

Wlg

Kn

=

Wld

Figure 2.11

shows the bode plot of the lead function. The lead term is used to

counteract lags in the system. The speed loop bandwidth appears to the position loop as a low pass filter or a lag. The lead filter can be used to cancel the speed loop lag and replace it with a faster lag.

2-42


In the following example:

– The system appears as a lag with a 5 radian/second response.

– The lead filter was set to compensate for the 5 radian/second response

(Wld=5)

– The lag filter was set to 50 radian/second response (Wlg=50)

– Kn is set to Wlg/Wld (50/5) = 10

– Wn is set to Wlg = 50

Figure 2.12 Lead Filter Added to System

Figure 2.12

shows the results of adding the lead-lag. The system had a response of

5 radians/second. By adding the lead-lag filter the system response was increased to

50 radians/second.

There is lead lag filter for the position loops speed reference. The parameters are

Kn=Parameter 25 [STrim2 Filt Gain], Wn=Parameter 26 [SpdTrim2 Filt BW].

A typical use would be to set the lead function (Wld) to the velocity bandwidth

(parameter 90 [Spd Reg BW]) and the lag (Wlg) function to approximately five times (5x) the lead term.

Notch Filter

A Notch Filter is used to remove a specific frequency. On analog inputs and outputs, a notch filter could be used to eliminate any 60Hz noise received from adjacent 120 volt digital input and output wires.

The PowerFlex® 700S has a notch filter that is used to eliminate any resonant signal created by mechanical gear train. The mechanical gear train consists of two masses (the motor and the load) and spring (mechanical coupling between the two loads). This is shown in

Figure 2.13

.


2-43

Figure 2.13 Mechanical Gear Train

Bm BL

Kspring

Jm Jload

The resonant frequency is defined by the following equation:

resonance

=

Kspring

×

(

+

Jm Jload

)

Jm is the motor inertia (seconds).

Jload is the load inertia (seconds).

Kspring is the coupling spring constant (rad

2

/sec).

Figure 2.14

shows a two mass system with a resonant frequency of 62 radians/

second. One Hertz is equal to 2

π radians/second.

Figure 2.14 Resonance

The small inset shows a better representation of resonant frequency better.

The PowerFlex® 700S has a notch filter in the torque reference loop to eliminate such noise from the system. The notch filter frequency is parameter 118 [Notch Filt

Freq]. Due to the fact that most mechanical frequencies are described in Hertz,

[Notch Filt Freq] is in Hertz as well.

Figure 2.15

shows the same mechanical gear train as in Figure 2.14

. [Notch Filt

Freq] is set to 10.

2-44


Figure 2.15 10 Hz Notch

Conclusion

There are several filters used in the PowerFlex 700S for various applications.

The process trim uses a simple low pass filter to eliminate undesirable noise in the feedback circuit. The cut off frequency of the low pass filter is set by parameter

184 [PI Lpass Filt BW]. Typical values would range from 15-20 radians/second.

The speed loop uses a second order low pass filter after the speed error term is developed. The cut off frequency of the second order low pass filter is by parameter

89 [Spd Err Filt BW]. Typical value for this parameter is five times (5x) the speed loop bandwidth (parameter 90 [Spd Reg BW]).

There are several lead lag filters used in the PowerFlex 700S. The lead lag filter has two terms. The first term is the filter gain (Kn) and the second term is the filter frequency (Wn). The filter can be used as "lag" to eliminate noise from entering the control loop. The filter can be used as a "lead" to increase overall system performance.

To eliminate noise (lag) use with the light or heavy filter.

Light

Heavy

To use the lead function:

Kn

0.7

0.5

Wn

35

20

1. Set Wld equal to the desired lead in radians/second

2. Set Wlg equal to 5x Wld

3. Wn=Wlg

4. Kn=Wlg/Wld

The torque reference has a notch filter used to eliminate resonance signals. The notch frequency is set by parameter 118 [Notch Filt Freq]. This frequency is set to the mechanical resonance in hertz.

Flying Start


2-45

The Flying Start feature is used to start into a rotating motor, as quick as possible, and resume normal operation with a minimal impact on load or speed.

When a drive is started in its normal mode it initially applies a frequency of 0 Hz and ramps to the commanded speed. If the drive is started in this mode with the motor already spinning, large currents will be generated. An overcurrent trip may result if the current limiter cannot react quickly enough. The likelihood of an overcurrent trip is further increased if there is residual voltage on the spinning motor when the drive starts. Even if the current limiter is fast enough to prevent an overcurrent trip, it may take an unacceptable amount of time for synchronization to occur and for the motor to reach its desired frequency. In addition, larger mechanical stress is placed on the application, increasing downtime and repair costs while decreasing productivity.

The sensorless flying start function implements a frequency search algorithm that searches for the rotor speed and when found provides flux up time for the motor before transitioning to normal operation. The frequency search algorithm searches for a motor voltage that corresponds with the excitation current applied to the motor. This function is useful where very large inertia systems that would take an extended period to come to a stop if a drive trip would occur or in cases where an external source may be moving the motor before the drive would be started.

The PowerFlex 700S Phase I must be version 1.017 or later to support flying start.

!

!

ATTENTION: The user must determine the safe frequency search configuration at the system level. Incorrect selection(s) may result in personal injury due to machine motion.

ATTENTION: The Flying Start function is only used for sensorless operation. In all other cases the motor speed is known from the feedback device and a normal start may be used even if the motor is rotating providing the user has determined that the system is safe for re-starting while rotating.

Sensorless Flying Start Operation

There two modes available for the frequency search: last known frequency and preset frequency search.

Last Know Frequency

The last know frequency is the fastest method of flying start, with an initial search frequency starting at the last known operating frequency. This mode will search from the last known frequency toward zero frequency and, if the motor speed is not found, perform a start from zero speed. If the motor speed could reverse or increases to a larger speed a pull out or over voltage fault could occur. If a reversal or increase in motor speed could occur the preset frequency search should be used.

Preset Frequency Search

The preset frequency search starts the frequency search at the value set in parameter

451 [SrLss Preset Spd]. From this initial search frequency the search will move towards zero. Once zero frequency is reached the algorithm will reset to the opposite direction at the same initial frequency and again search toward zero. If zero is reached a second time the drive will perform a start from zero speed. The preset frequency search routine may take the longest to execute. The value entered

2-46

Detailed Drive Operation into parameter 451 [SrLss Preset Spd] should always be greater than the expected speed of the motor. If the motor speed is greater than the initial search frequency overvoltage trips could occur or the algorithm may not find the correct motor speed.

If the flying start function is active and the drive is started with the motor at zero speed the flying start search will add considerable extra delay to actually starting the motor.

Figure 2.16 Sensorless Flying Start From Last Known Speed

Flying Start Frequency Search

1.4

1.2

1

0.8

motor at

50% speed

0.6

Pwm stopped

0.4

0.2

0

0 2 tracking rotor speed

Frequency search from last known speed tracking lost frequency= 0

4

Rotor Speed Found

Time (seconds)

6

Accel to set speed and resume normal operation drive re-started

8

Motor Frequency

Figure 2.17 Sensorless Flying Start From Preset Speed

Sensorless Flying Start Configuration

Parameters 30 [Rev Speed Limit] and 31 [Fwd Speed Limit] must be set to magnitudes greater than the value set in parameter 451 [SrLss Preset Spd] to avoid over speed faults during the preset frequency search.

Parameter 222 [Motor Fdbk Sel] selects the primary speed feedback device. This parameter must be set to “2” for sensorless flying start if this is the active feedback device.

Parameter 223 [Mtr Fdbk Alt Sel] selects the alternate speed feedback device. This parameter must be set to “2” for sensorless flying start if this is the active feedback device.

Friction Compensation


2-47

Settings for parameter 222 [Motor Fdbk Sel] and 223 [Mtr Fdbk Alt Sel]:

5

6

3

4

1

2

Value

0

Description

Encoder 0

Encoder 1

Sensorless

Reserved

Motor Sim

FB Opt Port0

FB Opt Port1

Parameter 451 [SrLss Preset Spd] sets the initial frequency for the flying start frequency search. This value should always be set greater than the expected motor speed to avoid regeneration and the chance of an over voltage fault.

Parameter 510 [FOC Mode Config] bit 23 "SrLssFStrtEn" determines whether flying start is enabled or disabled. Setting this parameter to “1” enables the flying start function. When set to “0” the flying start function is disabled.

Parameter 510 [FOC Mode Config] bit 26 "FS PresetSpd" set to “1 uses parameter

451 [SrLss Preset Spd] as initial frequency for the flying start. When set to “0” the flying start frequency search uses the last known frequency.

The friction compensation block is used to calculate breakaway torque and the torque needed just to keep the motor running at a constant speed due to friction.

Parameter 140 [FricComp Spd Ref] is linked to parameter 43 [S Curve Spd Ref].

The speed reference is needed because the torque needed due to friction is much more near 0 speed than at higher speeds.

Friction compensation is enabled by setting parameter 151 [Logic Command] bit

11 - "Frict Comp" to “1”.

Parameter 141 [FricComp Setup] is used to configure the friction compensation algorithm. This is a packed word of 3 digits. Each digit has a possible selection of

10 levels.

• The least significant digit sets the speed threshold in intervals of 0.0005 pu speed.

• The next (middle) digit sets the hysteresis band for the "units" digit in intervals of 0.0005 pu velocity.

• The most significant digit sets the number of time steps from stick to slip, each step is 0.002 sec.

N N N

Number of

Time Stops

Units

Hysteresis

Example: Fsetup = 524 means: 5 time steps between stick and slip, each of

0.002 sec. duration, 2 counts of hysteresis or 0.001 pu_speed (each count is

0.0005 pu speed), and 4 counts or 0.002 pu_speed is the trigger threshold (each count is 0.0005 pu speed).

2-48


Parameter 142 [FricComp Stick] sets the torque reference needed to break away from zero speed. Breakaway torque due to friction is always greater than running torque due to friction. This parameter is in per unit, so a value of 1 equals 100% motor torque.

Parameter 143 [FricComp Slip] sets the torque level to sustain very low speed once breakaway has been achieved. Again, the torque required to run very close to 0 speed due to friction will be greater than the torque required to run at higher speeds due to friction. This parameter is in per unit, so a value of 1 equals 100% motor torque.

Parameter 144 [FricComp Rated] sets the torque needed to keep the motor running at base motor speed and with no process loading. This parameter is in per unit, so a value of 1 equals 100% motor torque. The friction compensation algorithm assumes a linear or viscous component of friction between [FricComp Slip] and [FricComp

Rated].

The friction compensation block calculates the torque needed due to friction, which shows up in parameter 145 [FricComp TorqAdd]. [FricComp TorqAdd] is summed with the output of the inertia compensation block and the torque generated by the speed reference loop. That summed torque enters the torque selection block refer to

Torque Reference

for more information).

S Curve Spd Ref

43

Link

FricComp Spd Ref

140

151 11

FricComp Setup

FricComp Stick

FricComp Slip

FricComp Rated

141

142

143

144

Friction Comp

FricComp TorqAdd

145 to Torque

Control [4B2]

Fuses and Circuit Breakers

The following tables provide drive ratings (including continuous, 1 minute and 3 second) and recommended AC line input fuse and circuit breaker information. Both types of short circuit protection are acceptable for UL and IEC requirements. Sizes listed are the recommended sizes based on 40 o

C and the U.S. N.E.C. Other country, state or local codes may require different ratings.

Fusing

If fuses are chosen as the desired protection method, refer to the recommended types listed below. If available amp ratings do not match the tables provided, the closest fuse rating that exceeds the drive rating should be chosen. IEC - BS88

(British Standard) Parts 1 & 2 (1), EN60269-1, Parts 1 & 2, type gG or equivalent should be used.

UL - UL Class CC, T, RK1 or J must be used.

Circuit Breakers

The “non-fuse” listings in the following tables include both circuit breakers

(inverse time or instantaneous trip) and 140M Self-Protecting Motor Starters. If one of these is chosen as the desired protection method, the following requirements apply. IEC and UL - Both types of devices are acceptable for IEC and UL installations.

e Fram Frame


2-49

2-50


e Fram

Frame


2-51

2-52


Frame

e Fram


2-53

2-54


Frame


2-55

690 Volt AC Input Protection Devices (See Notes below)

Drive

Catalog

Number kW

Rating

ND HD

690 Volt AC Input

20DF052 5 45

–

20DF060 5 55

–

20DF082 5 75

–

20DF098 5 90

–

20DF119 6 110

–

–

55

–

75

– 4

37.5

4

–

45

4

4

–

90

2

2

2

2

2

2

PWM Freq. Temp. Input Ratings Output Amps

kHz

°C

Amps kVA Cont.

1 Min.

3 Sec.

Dual Element Time

Delay Fuse

Min.

(1)

Max.

(2)

50

50

40

40

50

50

50

50

50

50

46.9

40.1

57.7

46.9

79.0

57.7

94.7

79.0

115

94.7

56.1

52

48.0

46

68.9

60

56.1

52

94.4

82

68.9

60

113 98

94.4

82

137

113

119

98

90

90

108

123

57

69

66

78

131

147

123

120

127

140

78

92

90

104

179

196

100

80

125

100

60

50

80

60

150

125

200

125

200

200

110

90

125

110

250

200

Non-Time Delay

Fuse

Min.

(1)

Max.

(2)

100

80

125

100

60

50

80

60

150

125

375

225

375

375

175

150

225

175

400

375

Circuit

Breaker

(3)

Max.

(10)

–

–

375

225

375

375

175

150

225

175

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

Motor Circuit

Protector

(4)

Max.

(10)

Power

Dissipation

Watts

NA

NA

NA

NA

NA

NA

NA

NA

NA

NA

20DF142 6 132

–

–

110

2

2

50

50

138

115

165

137

142

119

156

179

213

238

175

150

300

250

175

150

450

400

–

–

–

–

NA

NA

Notes:

(1)

Minimum protection device size is the lowest rated device that supplies maximum protection without nuisance tripping.

(2)

Maximum protection device size is the highest rated device that supplies drive protection. For US NEC, minimum size is 125% of motor FLA. Ratings shown are maximum.

(3)

Circuit Breaker - inverse time breaker. For US NEC, minimum size is 125% of motor FLA. Ratings shown are maximum.

(4)

Motor Circuit Protector - instantaneous trip circuit breaker. For US NEC minimum size is 125% of motor FLA. Ratings shown are maximum.

(5)

Bulletin 140M with adjustable current range should have the current trip set to the minimum range that the device will not trip.

(6)

Manual Self-Protected (Type E) Combination Motor Controller, UL listed for 208 Wye or Delta, 240 Wye or Delta, 480Y/277 or 600Y/ 347. Not UL listed for use on

480V or 600V Delta/Delta systems.

(7)

The AIC ratings of the Bulletin 140M Motor Protector may vary. See publication 140M-SG001.

(8)

20BC085 current rating is limited to 45 degrees C ambient.

(9)

20BC205 current rating is limited to 40 degrees C ambient.

(10)

Maximum allowable rating by US NEC. Exact size must be chosen for each installation.

540 Volt DC Input Protection Devices (Footnotes found on page 56)

Drive Catalog Number Frame

540 Volt DC Input

20DC2P1

20DC3P5

20DC5P0

20DC8P7

20DC011

20DC015

20DC022

20DC030

20DC037

20DC043

20DC056

20DC072

20DC085

3

3

2

2

3

4

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

20DH105

➊

20DH125

➊

20DH140

➊

20DH170

➊

20DH205

➊

20DH261

20DH300

20DH385

20DH460

20DH500

5

5

6

6

6

9

9

10

10

10

kW Rating

ND

-

200

-

250

–

132

-

160

–

90

–

110

–

55

–

75

-

250

-

37

45

–

55

15

18.5

22

30

0.75

1.5

2.2

4

5.5

7.5

11

HD

630

700

700

900

350

500

500

630

200

350

300

400

200

225

150

300

900

1000

1000

150

200

150

200

60

80

90

110

20

25

30

45

6

8

10

490

600

600

770

313

410

410

500

210

255

280

289

170

163

168

210

770

750

840

112

128

144

158

45

60

74

86

3.2

6.0

7.5

13.2

17.4

23.1

33

368

424

450

506

255

287

308

330

158

187

210

220

128

138

144

154

578

550

630

84

94

108

116

33

45

56

64

2.4

4.5

5.5

9.9

13

17.2

24.2

245

385

300

460

170

261

205

300

105

170

140

205

85

125

96

140

385

500

420

72

85

72

105

30

37

43

56

2.1

3.5

5.0

8.7

11.5

15.4

22

152

238

186

284

103.9

161

127

186

51.3

75.5

63.7

85.6

63.4

103.9

85.6

125.3

238

309

260

17.9

22.1

25.7

33.4

43.5

51.3

43.5

63.4

1.1

2.0

2.9

5.0

6.8

9.1

13

293

460

359

550

192.4

312

245

359

95.1

139.8

91.9

158.4

117.4

192.4

158.4

232

460

598

502

33.2

40.9

47.5

61.9

80.5

95.1

80.5

117.4

2.1

3.7

5.3

9.3

12.6

16.8

24

132

-

160

-

90

-

110

-

55

–

75

–

45

–

45

–

200

-

200

30

–

37

–

11

15

18.5

22

0.55

0.75

1.5

3.0

4

5.5

7.5

DC Input Ratings

Amps kW

Output Amps

Cont.

1 Min.

3 Sec.

Fuse

Non-Time Delay Fuse

Bussmann Style or Equiv.

➋

JKS-6

JKS-8

JKS-10

JKS-20

JKS-25

JKS-30

JKS-45

JKS-60

JKS-80

JKS-90

JKS-110

JKS-150

JKS-200

JKS-150

JKS-200

JKS-200

JKS-225

Not Available at time of Print

JKS-300

JKS-200

JKS-350

JKS-300

JKS-400

JKS-350

170M6608

170M6608

170M6610

170M6610

170M6611

170M6611

170M6613

170M6613

170M6614

170M6614

2-56



20DH590 11

kW Rating

ND

500

20DH650 11

-

500

-

20DH730 11 600

-

-

HD

450

-

500

-

500


Amps

706

kW

365

622

777

706

322

402

365

873

777

452

402

Output Amps

Cont.

590

1 Min.

649

520

650

590

780

715

885

730

650

803

975

3 Sec.

956

956

1062

1062

1095

1170

Fuse

630 (2 per phs)

630 (2 per phs)

700 (2 per phs)

700 (2 per phs)

700 (2 per phs)

700 (2 per phs)



➋

170M6610

170M6610

170M6611

170M6611

170M6611

170M6611


650 Volt DC Input

20DD2P1

20DD3P4

20DD5P0

20DD8P0

20DD011

20DD014

20DD022

20DD027

20DD034

20DD040

20DD052

20DD065

20DD077

1

2

0

1

0

0

0

0

3

3

2

3

4

HP Rating

ND HD

20DJ096

➌

20DJ125

➌

20DJ156

➌

20DJ180

➌

20DJ248

20DJ261

20DJ300

20DJ385

20DJ460

20DJ500

20DJ590

20DJ650

20DJ730

5

5

6

6

6

9

9

10

10

10

11

11

11

300

-

350

-

200

-

250

-

150

–

200

–

100

–

125

–

450

-

500

60

–

75

–

25

30

40

50

7.5

10

15

20

3

5

1

2

-

500

-

600

-

-

250

-

300

-

150

-

200

–

125

–

150

–

75

–

100

-

350

-

–

50

–

60

20

25

30

40

5

7.5

10

15

2

3

0.75

1.5

450

-

500

-

500

650 Volt DC Input Protection Devices


Amps kW

Output Amps

Cont.

1 Min.

3 Sec.

Fuse



➋

36.4

42.9

55.7

69.7

84.5

67.9

105.3

84.5

1.9

3.0

4.5

8.1

11.1

14.7

23.3

28.9

137.1

105.3

171.2

137.1

204.1

171.2

441

343

527

441

299

235

343

281

572

481

676

595

744

676

836

744

600

600

770

770

410

410

500

490

270

312

392

360

163

168

234

250

750

840

956

116

130

144

154

54

68

80

104

3.2

6.0

7.5

12

16.5

22

33

44

424

450

506

578

287

308

330

368

198

234

273

270

138

144

172

188

550

630

649

85

98

106

116

40.5

51

60

78

2.4

4.5

5.5

8.8

12.1

16.5

24.2

33

385

300

460

385

261

205

300

245

180

156

248

180

125

96

156

125

500

420

590

77

65

96

77

34

40

52

65

11

14

22

27

2.1

3.4

5.0

8.0

23.6

27.8

36.1

45.4

54.7

45.4

68.3

54.7

1.2

2.0

2.9

5.2

7.2

9.5

15.1

18.8

88.9

68.3

110.9

88.9

132.2

110.9

274

213

327

274

186

146

213

174

356

299

420

370

463

420

520

463

520

650

590

730

650

780

715

885

803

975

956

1062

1062

1095

1170

700

700

900

900

500

500

630

630

400

300

550

400

250

200

300

250

150

150

200

150

70

80

100

150

20

30

45

60

6

6

10

15

170M6608

170M6608

170M6610

170M6610

170M6611

170M6611

170M6613

170M6613

1000

1000

630 (2 per phs)

630 (2 per phs)

700 (2 per phs)

170M6614

170M6614

170M6610

170M6610

170M6611

700 (2 per phs) 170M6611

700 (2 per phs) 170M6611

700 (2 per phs) 170M6611

JKS-6

JKS-6

JKS-10

JKS-15

JKS-20

JKS-30

JKS-45

JKS-60

JKS-70

JKS-80

JKS-100

JKS-150

JKS-150

JKS-150

JKS-200

JKS-150

JKS-250

JKS-200

JKS-300

JKS-250

JKS-400

JKS-300

➊

➋

➌

Also applies to “P” voltage class.

The power source to Common Bus inverters must be derived from AC Voltages 600V or less, as defined in

NFPA70; Art 430-18 (NEC).

Battery supplies or MG sets are not included

The following devices were validated to break current of the derived power DC Bus:

Disconnects: Allen-Bradley Bulletin No. 1321, 30 to 400 A; Bulletin No. 194, 30 to 400 A

ABB: OESA, 600 & 800 A; OESL, all sizes

Fuses: Bussmann Type JKS, all sizes; Type 170M, Case Sizes 1, 2 and 3

Ferraz Shawmut Type HSJ, all sizes

For any other devices, please contact the factory.

Also applies to “R” voltage class.

Grounding, General

HIM Memory

HIM Operations


2-57



See

Copy Cat

The User Display

The User Display is shown when module keys have been inactive for a predetermined amount of time. The display can be programmed to show pertinent information.

Setting the User Display

Step

1. Press the Up Arrow or Down Arrow to scroll to Operator Intrfc. Press Enter.

Key(s)

2. Press the Up Arrow or Down Arrow to scroll to User Display. Press Enter.

3. Select the desired user display. Press Enter.

Scroll to the parameter that the user display will be based on.

4. Press Enter. Set a scale factor.

Sel

5. Press Enter to save the scale factor and move to the last line.

6. Press the Up Arrow or Down Arrow to change the text.

7. Press Enter to save the new user display.

Example Displays

Operator Intrfc:

Change Password

User Display

Parameters

Setting the Properties of the User Display

The following HIM parameters can be set as desired:

• User Display - Enables or disables the user display.

• User Display 1 - Selects which user display parameter appears on the top line of the user display.

• User Display 2 - Selects which user display parameter appears on the bottom line of the user display.

• User Display Time - Sets how many seconds will elapse after the last programming key is touched before the HIM displays the user display.

2-58


Inertia Adaptation

Inertia adaptation is used to compensate for lost motion, which occurs when a gear box and/or "springy" coupling is present. Inertia adaptation can allow the user to increase the speed regulator bandwidth by up to four (4) times.

For example, a motor connected to a gearbox is shown:

This gearbox can be represented by a spring (k) and gear back lash (BL):

When the speed of the motor increases, there is a period of time (represented by

∆x) before the teeth of the gearbox engage. After that time, there will be some twisting

(like a spring) in the shaft after the teeth of the gearbox engage. This lost motion causes mechanical instability and limits how high the speed regulator bandwidth can be set without causing instability. Inertia adaptation detects the lost motion and a higher speed regulator bandwidth can be achieved without instability.

Configuration:

See

Speed Regulator Tuning -

Advanced Tuning for the Speed Regulator with

Gearbox or Belt on page 2-127 for details on using inertia adaptation.

Total Inertia

Motor Spd Fdbk

Inert Adapt Sel

(Inrtia Adapt)

(Load Est)

9

300

132 00

Inert Adapt BW

Inert Adapt Gain

01

133

134

Inertia

Adaptation

From Spd /Torque

Mode Selection

+

-

Limit

Torque Limits

Motor Torque Ref

303

To Current

Control

Inertia Compensation

Input Devices


2-59

During speed changes, a certain level of torque is required due to load inertia. That level of torque is above the torque used to run at constant speed. Inertia compensation calculates that torque based on the acceleration or deceleration rate.

Then that acceleration or deceleration torque can be fed forward into the torque control, making for smoother accels and decels, especially with high inertia loads.

Parameter 56 [Inertia SpeedRef] is linked to parameter 43 [S Curve Spd Ref]. This becomes the speed reference that the inertia compensation block uses to calculate the acceleration or deceleration rate, also known as the derivative of speed with respect to time.

Inertia compensation is enabled by turning on parameter 151 [Logic Command], bit

10 - "Inertia Comp".

Parameter 9 [Total Inertia] is calculated during the autotune and is used along with the calculated acceleration or deceleration rate to calculate the torque adder.

Parameter 57 [InertiaAccelGain] determines the gain for the inertia compensation during acceleration. A gain of 1 results in 100% compensation. Parameter 58

[InertiaDecelGain] determines the gain for the inertia compensation during deceleration.

Parameter 60 [DeltaSpeedScale] is a multiplier for the torque output of the inertia compensation block. It is used in center wind and center unwind applications to compensate for diameter build-up.

The inertia compensation outputs the calculated torque to the parameter 59 [Inertia

Torq Add]. [Inertia Torq Add] is summed with the output of the friction compensation block and the torque generated by the speed reference loop. That

summed torque enters the torque selection block (refer to Torque Reference for

more information).

Parameter 55 [Speed Comp] contains the rate of acceleration or deceleration calculated in the inertia compensation block. This parameter is used in following applications. Link parameter 23 [Speed Trim 3] to [Speed Comp] and set parameter

24 [SpeedTrim3 Scale] to 0.002 to reduce position error in following applications.

S Curve Spd Ref

43

Link

Inertia SpeedRef

56

Logic Command

(Inertia Comp)

151

Total Inertia

InertiaAccelGain

InertiaDecelGain

DeltaSpeedScale

10

9

57

58

60

∆n

∆t

Inertia Comp

Inertia Torq Add

59 to Torque

Control [4B1]

Speed Comp

55

Contactors

Refer to

Motor Start/Stop Precautions

Circuit Breakers/Fuses

Refer to

Fuses and Circuit Breakers

2-60


Filters, EMC

Refer to

CE Conformity

Refer to

Start/Stop Modes .

Input Modes

Input Power Conditioning



Jog

A jog reference is usually used to run the motor at some preset, low speed. Two separate jog speeds can be used as a speed reference - parameter 17 [Jog Speed 1] or parameter 18 [Jog Speed 2]. A jog could be initiated by a Digital Input, by the

Logic Command word from a DPI Adapter such as a HIM, or by the Logic

Command word from DriveLogix. In turn, a valid jog command initiated from one of those adapters will turn on either bit 18 in parameter 152 [Applied LogicCmd] to select jog speed 1 or bit 23 in [Applied LogicCmd] to select jog speed 2. Note that the jog command is a maintained type of logic, so that the jog speed will be active while the jog command bit is maintained.

0

Jog Speed 1

17

1

Applied LogicCmd

152 18 152 23

0

1

18

Jog Speed 2

Links

Links are software connections between two parameters. This allows one parameter to receive information from another parameter.

Parameter Type

Source

Description

Provides information

Parameter Symbol

Source

Destination Receives information

Dest.


2-61

Each destination parameter can only have one source parameter. However, source parameters may be linked to multiple destination parameters. The information from the link always flows from the source to the destination parameter.

Dest.

Information

Source

Dest.

Dest.

Information

Information

Source

Several default links are set in the drive as default. Modifying these links can be done two ways:

Using the HIM

Access the destination parameter you wish to use for the link. (This cannot be done from the ALT Parameter view window, only the parameter list). When you access the parameter you want to edit, press the ALT, then the View button. This will display a window with the mode selection. Use the up/down arrow keys on the top row of buttons to select "Defined Link" and press Enter. When in this mode, pressing the Select button will allow you to enter the source parameter number.

Using Drive Executive

Double-click on the destination parameter. The parameter XX dialog box displays.

Click on the Link Source tab. Select the Parameter radio button and select the source parameter in the Selected Parameter field.

2-62


Masks

A mask is a parameter that contains one bit for each of the possible adapters. Each bit acts like a valve for issued commands. Closing the valve (setting a bit value to 0) stops the command from reaching the DriveLogix. Opening the valve (setting a bit value to 1) allows the command to pass through the mask into the DriveLogix.

Table 2.C Mask Parameters and Functions

Parameter

[Logic Mask]

[Start Mask]

[Jog Mask]

[Direction Mask]

[Fault Clr Mask]

Function

Determines which adapters can control the drive. When the bit for an adapter is set to “0,” the adapter will have no control functions except for stop.

Controls which adapters can issue start commands.

Controls which adapters can issue jog commands.

Controls which adapters can issue forward/reverse direction commands.

Controls which adapters can clear a fault.

The individual bits for each parameter are as follows:

• Bit 0 - “Digital Input”

• Bit 1 - “Adapter 1”



• Bit 4 - Not Used



• Bit 7 - “DriveLogix”

Example: A customer's process is normally controlled by a remote PLC, but the drive is mounted on the machine. The customer does not want anyone to walk up to the drive and reverse the motor because it would damage the process. The local HIM (drive mounted Adapter 1) is configured with an operator's panel that includes a “REV” Button. To assure that only the PLC (connected to Adapter 5) has direction control, the

[Direction Mask] can be set as follows:

Direction Mask 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0

Adapter # 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

This “masks out” the reverse function from all adapters except Adapter 5, making the local HIM (Adapter 1) REV button inoperable. See

Owners later in this chapter

or PowerFlex 700S User Manual for more information.

See

Autotune on page 2-4 .

Motor Control Mode

Motor Nameplate

[Motor NP Volts]

The motor nameplate base voltage defines the output voltage, when operating at rated current, rated speed, and rated temperature.

[Motor NP FLA]

The motor nameplate defines the output amps, when operating at rated voltage, rated speed, and rated temperature. It is used in the motor thermal overload, and in the calculation of slip.

[Motor NP Hz]

The motor nameplate base frequency defines the output frequency, when operating at rated voltage, rated current, rated speed, and rated temperature.

[Motor NP RPM]

The motor nameplate RPM defines the rated speed, when operating at motor nameplate base frequency, rated current, base voltage, and rated temperature. This is used to calculate slip.

Motor Overload


2-63

[Motor NP Power]

The motor nameplate power is used together with the other nameplate values to calculate default values for motor parameters to and facilitate the commissioning process. This may be entered in horsepower or in kilowatts as selected in the previous parameter or kW for certain catalog numbers and HP for others.

[Motor NP Pwr Units]

The rated power of the motor may be entered in horsepower or in kilowatts. This parameter determines the units on the following parameter.

[Motor Poles]

The number of motor poles - only even numbers are allowed (this may or may not appear on the nameplate).

The overload capability applies to the rated speed range.

Low Overload

After continuous operation at the rated output current, overload may be 110% rated output current (I

L

) for 1 minute as long as it is followed by a period of load less than the rated current so that the output current over the duty cycle does not exceed the rated output current (I

L

).

Example: If the duty cycle requires 110% rated output current for 1 minute of every 10 minutes, the remaining 9 minutes must be at approximately

98% rated current or less to maintain output current less than 100%. If the requirement is 1 minute out of 60 minutes, the remaining 59 minutes must be at approximately 99% rated current or less.

Figure 2.18 Illustration of I

L

Current

L

I

1.1 x I

L

1 minute

9 minutes

Time

High Overload

After continuous operation at the rated output current, overload may be 150% rated output current (I

H

) for 1 minute as long as it is followed by a period of load less than the rated current so that the output current over the duty cycle does not exceed the rated output current (I

H

).

Example: If the duty cycle requires 150% rated output current for 1 minute of every 10 minutes, the remaining 9 minutes must be at approximately

92% rated current or less to maintain output current less than 100%. If the requirement is 1 minute out of 60 minutes, the remaining 59 minutes must be at approximately 98% rated current or less.

2-64


Motor Start/Stop

Precautions

Mounting

Output Devices

Input Contactor Precautions

!

ATTENTION: A contactor or other device that routinely disconnects and reapplies the AC line to the drive to start and stop the motor can cause drive hardware damage. The drive is designed to use control input signals that will start and stop the motor. If an input device is used, operation must not exceed one cycle per minute or drive damage will occur.

ATTENTION: The drive start/stop/enable control circuitry includes solid state components. If hazards due to accidental contact with moving machinery or unintentional flow of liquid, gas or solids exist, an additional hardwired stop circuit may be required to remove the AC line to the drive. An auxiliary braking method may be required.

Output Contactor Precaution

!

ATTENTION: To guard against drive damage when using output contactors, the following information must be read and understood.

One or more output contactors may be installed between the drive and motor(s) for the purpose of disconnecting or isolating certain motors/ loads. If a contactor is opened while the drive is operating, power will be removed from the respective motor, but the drive will continue to produce voltage at the output terminals. In addition, reconnecting a motor to an active drive (by closing the contactor) could produce excessive current that may cause the drive to fault. If any of these conditions are determined to be undesirable or unsafe, an auxiliary contact on the output contactor should be wired to a drive digital input that is programmed as ìEnable.î This will cause the drive to execute a coast-to-stop (cease output) whenever an output contactor is opened

.

As a general rule, drives should be mounted on a metallic flat surface in the vertical orientation. If considering other orientation, contact the Factory for additional data.

Refer to the Chapter 1 - Installation/Wiring in the “PowerFlex 700S User Manual,” publication 20D-UM001 for mounting instructions and limitations. This publication is available online at: http://literature.rockwellautomation.com/literature

Drive Output Disconnection

!

ATTENTION: Any disconnecting means wired to the drive output terminals U, V and W must be capable of disabling the drive if opened during drive operation. If opened during drive operation, the drive will continue to produce output voltage between U, V, W. An auxiliary contact must be used to simultaneously disable the drive.

Allen-Bradley Drives can be used with an output contactor between the drive and motor. This contactor can be opened under load without damage to the drive. It is

Output Display


2-65

recommended, however, that the drive have a programmed “Enable” input and that this input be opened at the same time as the output contactor.

Cable Termination



Output Reactor

Bulletin 1321 Reactors can be used for drive input and output. These reactors are specifically constructed to accommodate IGBT inverter applications with switching frequencies up to 20 kHz. They have a UL approved dielectric strength of 4000 volts, opposed to a normal rating of 2500 volts. The first two and last two turns of each coil are triple insulated to guard against insulation breakdown resulting from high dv/dt. When using motor line reactors, it is recommended that the drive PWM frequency be set to its lowest value to minimize losses in the reactors.

By using an output reactor the effective motor voltage will be lower because of the voltage drop across the reactor - this may also mean a reduction of motor torque.

Output Current (Parameter 308)

Displays measured RMS drive output current. Parameter 297 [Output Curr Disp] which is the integer equivalent of parameter 308 with * internal storage in 1/10

Amps (10 = 1.0amp).

Output Frequency (Parameter 310)

This parameter displays the actual output frequency of the drive. The output frequency is created by a summation of commanded frequency and any active speed regulator such as slip compensation, PI Loop, bus regulator. The actual output may be different than the commanded frequency.

Output Power (Parameter 311)

This parameter displays the output kW of the drive. Motor Power is the calculated product of the torque reference and motor speed feedback. A 125ms filter is applied to this result. Positive values indicate motoring power; negative values indicate regenerative power. The output power is a calculated value and tends to be inaccurate at lower speeds. It is not recommended for use as a process variable to control a process.

Output Voltage (Parameter 307)

Displays RMS line-to-line fundamental output voltage at the drive output terminals.

This data is averaged and updated every 50 milliseconds. The actual output voltage may be different than that determined by the sensorless vector or V/Hz algorithms because it may be modified by features such as the Auto-Economizer.

2-66


Overspeed Limit

Owners

The absolute overspeed limit parameter, parameter 335 [Abs OverSpd Lim], is an adjustable setting. This sets a limit tolerance below parameter 30 [Rev Speed Lim] and above parameter 31 [Fwd Speed Lim], that is allowable. This can be used as a safe working speed limit.

Example 1 Speed reference is set to equal parameter 31 [Fwd Speed Lim]. Based on tuning of the drive, the speed could overshoot the commanded speed. If parameter 335 [Abs OverSpd Lim] is set equal to the forward speed limit and an overshoot is speed occurs, the drive will fault on an absolute overspeed.

Example 2 Drive is configured as a torque follower. If the mechanical connection to the load is severed, the torque command to the drive will probably be greater than the motor unloaded will require to maintain the system speed. This will cause the motor speed to increase until the torque command is met. Setting parameter 335 [Abs OverSpd Lim] to the safe motor speed will cause the fault to occur when the motor speed increase beyond this limit.

An owner is a parameter that contains one bit for each of the possible adapters. The bits are set high (value of 1) when its adapter is currently issuing that command, and set low when its adapter is not issuing that command.

Table 2.D Owner Parameters and Functions

Parameter

[Stop Owner]

[Start Owner]

[Jog Owner]

Function

Indicates the adapters that are presently issuing a valid stop command.

Indicates the adapters that are presently issuing a valid start command.

Indicates the adapters that are presently issuing a valid jog command.

[Direction Owner] Indicates the adapter that currently has exclusive control of direction changes.

[Fault Clr Owner] Indicates the adapters that are presently issuing a valid start command.

The bits for each parameter are broken down as follows:

• Bit 0 - “Digital Input”


• Bit2 - “Adapter 2”





• Bit 7 - “DriveLogix”

Ownership falls into two categories:

1. Exclusive: Only one adapter at a time can issue the command and only one bit in the parameter will be high.

2. Non Exclusive: Multiple adapters can simultaneously issue the same command and multiple bits may be high.

Some ownership must be exclusive; that is, only one Adapter at a time can issue certain commands and claim ownership of that function. For example, it is not allowable to have one Adapter command the drive to run in the forward direction while another Adapter is issuing a command to make the drive run in reverse.

Direction Control, therefore, is exclusive ownership.


2-67

Conversely, any number of adapters can simultaneously issue Stop Commands.

Therefore, Stop Ownership is not exclusive.

Example: The operator presses the Stop button on the Local HIM to stop the drive. When the operator attempts to restart the drive by pressing the

HIM Start button, the drive does not restart. The operator needs to determine why the drive will not restart.

The operator first views the Start owner to be certain that the Start button on the

HIM is issuing a command.

Start Owner

Bit

Adapter #

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0

When the local Start button is pressed, the display indicates that the command is coming from the HIM.

Start Owner

Bit

Adapter #

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0

The [Start Owner] indicates that there is not any maintained Start commands causing the drive to run.

Stop Owner

Bit

Adapter #

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0

The operator then checks the Stop Owner. Notice that bit 0 is a value of “1,” indicating that the Stop device wired to the Digital Input terminal block is open, issuing a Stop command to the drive.

Until this device is closed, a permanent Start Inhibit condition exists and the drive will not restart.

2-68


460

460

460

460

460

460

460

460

460

460

460

460

460

460

460

460

460

460

460

460

460

460

460

460

460

460

460

460

230

230

230

230

230

230

230

230

230

MPL-B660F

MPL-B680D

MPL-B680F

MPL-B860D

MPL-B880C

MPL-B880D

MPL-B960B

MPL-B960C

MPL-B960D

MPL-B980B

MPL-B980C

MPL-B980D

MPL-B310P

MPL-B320P

MPL-B330P

MPL-B420P

MPL-B430P

MPL-B4520P

MPL-B4530F

MPL-B4530K

MPL-B4540F

MPL-B4560F

MPL-B520K

MPL-B540K

MPL-B560F

MPL-B580F

MPL-B580J

MPL-B640F

MPG-A004-031

MPG-A010-031

MPG-A010-091

MPG-A025-031

MPG-A025-091

MPG-A050-031

MPG-A050-091

MPG-A110-031

MPG-A110-091

Model Number

Parameter #

MPL-A310P

MPL-A310F

MPL-A320P

MPL-A320H

MPL-A330P

MPL-A420P

MPL-A430P

MPL-A430H

MPL-A4520P

MPL-A4520K

MPL-A4530F

MPL-A4530K

MPL-A4540C

MPL-A4540F

MPL-A520K

MPL-A540K

MPL-A560F

Permanent Magnet Motors

The following table contains a list of specifications for the permanent magnet motors compatible with PowerFlex 700S drives. Note that you must have a high resolution Stegmann or compatible resolver.

Motor NP Volts

(line to line V rms)

230

230

230

230

230

230

230

230

230

230

230

230

230

230

1

230

230

230

Table 2.E Motor Name Plate and Rating Specification

s

Motor NP FLA (A rms)

Motor NP

Frequency

(Hz)

8.6

12.4

10.6

9.5

14.4

6.6

13.0

16.3

29.3

29.3

2

3.4

2.1

6.4

4.6

8.5

9.0

11.9

184.7

234.0

223.3

144.7

196.0

93.3

162.0

208.0

180.7

125.3

3

294.0

185.3

271.3

208.7

280.7

268.7

234.0

Motor NP RPM

(oper. rpm)

2770

3510

3350

2170

2940

1400

2430

3120

2710

1880

4

4410

2780

4070

3130

4210

4030

3510

Motor NP

Power (KW)

1.80

2.20

2.10

1.90

2.50

1.50

2.60

3.50

5.50

5.50

5

0.73

0.46

1.30

1.00

1.80

2.00

2.20

8

8

8

8

8

8

8

8

8

8

8

8

8

8

8

8

7

8

Motor

Poles

Current peak

(A rms)

35.4

30.4

29.7

43.8

20.5

38.2

46.0

84.9

84.9

9.9

6.6

20.9

13.6

26.9

32.5

47.4

31.8

System Cont.

Stall Torque

(N-m)

5.99

5.99

8.36

8.13

10.20

10.20

10.70

19.40

27.90

1.58

1.58

3.05

3.05

4.08

4.74

5.99

6.21

Motor Max

RPM (rpm)

5000

4000

2800

4000

1500

3000

4000

4000

3000

5000

3000

5000

3500

5000

5000

5000

3500

67.9

66.5

67.9

67.5

69.0

113.2

63.6

88.4

102.5

70.7

99.0

141.4

16.3

25.5

23.3

42.4

42.4

66.5

66.5

46.0

3.0

5.0

7.0

9.2

12.0

17.0

13.4

19.1

4.0

6.0

2.3

19.8

8.5

53.0

15.6

53.0

33.2

8

8

8

8

8

8

8

8

8

8

8

8

8

8

8

8

8

8

8

8

8

8

8

8

8

8

8

8

12

12

12

12

12

8

8

8

12

6.15

9.30

7.50

12.50

12.60

15.00

16.00

14.80

20.00

17.00

16.80

22.00

3.00

3.20

3.50

5.40

5.40

7.10

5.40

6.10

0.72

1.30

1.70

1.90

2.40

2.50

2.20

2.60

0.21

0.36

0.19

0.88

0.52

1.50

0.75

2.20

1.60

1220

1850

1190

1440

1090

1300

1180

1140

1470

1080

1010

1400

2810

2170

3120

2660

1850

1990

1520

1590

4350

4220

3880

3830

3500

3910

2510

2970

3340

2840

4430

1810

1680

1200

2750

1220

1840

81.3

123.3

79.3

96.0

72.7

86.7

78.7

76.0

98.0

72.0

67.3

93.3

187.3

144.7

208.0

177.3

123.3

132.7

101.3

106.0

290.0

281.3

258.7

255.3

233.3

260.7

167.3

198.0

222.7

189.3

295.3

181.0

168.0

120.0

275.0

122.0

184.0

27.2

24.0

33.9

33.6

33.6

40.3

29.7

38.9

50.2

31.8

48.2

63.6

6.4

8.3

8.1

14.5

14.5

18.4

22.6

22.7

6.5

6.0

5.0

7.8

1.7

3.2

4.3

4.5

1.8

2.1

0.9

9.9

3.0

24.7

5.0

20.2

17.0

48.00

48.00

60.00

83.00

110.00

110.00

130.00

124.30

130.00

150.00

158.20

150.00

10.20

14.10

10.70

19.40

27.90

34.00

34.00

36.70

1.58

2.94

4.18

4.74

6.55

6.10

8.36

8.36

0.60

1.21

0.41

4.65

2.95

11.90

2.60

17.20

8.30

3000

2000

3000

2000

1500

2000

1200

1500

2000

1000

1500

2000

3000

3000

4000

4000

3000

3000

3800

3000

5000

5000

5000

5000

5000

5000

3000

4000

6000

4875

5900

5200

5625

2510

3775

2875

3500


2-69

Model Number

MPG-B010-031

MPG-B010-091

MPG-B025-031

MPG-B025-091

MPG-B050-031

MPG-B050-091

MPG-B110-031

MPG-B110-091

1326AB-B410G

1326AB-B410J

1326AB-B420E

1326AB-B420H

1326AB-B430E

1326AB-B430G

1326AB-B515E

1326AB-B515G

1326AB-B520E

1326AB-B520F

1326AB-B530E

1326AB-B720E

1326AB-B720F

1326AB-B730E

1326AB-B740C

1326AB-B740E

1326AS-B310H

1326AS-B330H

1326AS-B420G

1326AS-B440G

1326AS-B460F

1326AS-B630F

1326AS-B660E

1326AS-B690E

1326AS-B840E

1326AS-B860C

1326AH-B330F

1326AH-B440F

1326AH-B540F

3050R-7

11050R-7

460

460

460

460

460

460

460

460

460

460

460

460

460

460

460

460

460

460

460

460

460

460

460

460

460

460

460

460

460

390

390

Motor NP Volts

(line to line V rms)

460

460

460

460

460

460

460

460

Motor NP FLA (A rms)

Motor NP

Frequency

(Hz)

1.6

0.7

4.0

1.9

16.3

3.4

12.9

10.6

162.7

357.3

219.0

175.0

92.0

290.0

112.0

184.0

0.0

0.0

0.0

50.0

50.0

0.0

204.5

204.5

179.0

149.0

148.5

142.7

100.7

87.3

79.3

77.3

71.0

70.3

74.3

70.0

117.0

78.3

52.3

79.7

118.0

165.0

70.0

137.3

67.7

114.3

70.3

88.7

6.7

8.8

9.5

17.5

27.5

22.8

20.9

32.0

3.9

5.6

6.1

9.5

2.5

3.5

2.8

5.5

0.8

2.1

2.6

5.4

6.2

7.8

11.8

19.0

21.2

17.6

2.1

3.3

11.1

66.0

218.0

2130

2110

2230

2100

3510

2350

1570

2390

3540

4950

2100

4120

2030

3430

2110

2660

4090

4090

3580

2980

2970

2140

1510

1310

1190

1160

3000

2500

2500

500

500

Motor NP RPM

(oper. rpm)

2440

5360

2190

1750

920

2900

1120

1840

Motor NP

Power (KW)

0.34

0.23

0.92

0.54

1.20

0.79

2.00

1.60

Motor

Poles

12

12

12

12

8

8

12

12

4

4

4

4

4

4

4

4

4

4

4

4

4

4

4

4

8

8

6

8

8

8

6

6

6

6

2.90

2.90

4.20

6.80

11.70

9.60

8.70

12.70

1.00

1.40

1.10

2.20

1.40

2.30

2.30

2.90

0.30

0.90

1.20

2.00

2.80

2.40

3.40

5.00

4.70

6.00

0.75

1.22

2.60

30.00

110.00

12

12

20.1

26.4

28.5

52.5

66.5

66.5

62.7

66.5

7.4

10.4

8.5

15.6

11.7

16.8

18.3

28.5

2.4

6.0

7.8

16.2

18.6

18.5

29.8

41.3

39.5

44.4

9.0

13.8

47.2

132.0

436.0

Current peak

(A rms)

4.4

1.5

11.3

5.2

32.5

9.9

31.1

20.5

System Cont.

Stall Torque

(N-m)

1.33

0.41

4.02

2.95

12.40

2.60

17.00

8.30

Motor Max

RPM (rpm)

6450

6450

4838

5900

2510

4560

2420

3500

13.00

13.10

18.00

30.90

31.80

39.00

53.00

50.80

2.70

2.70

5.00

5.10

6.60

6.40

10.40

10.40

0.70

2.10

3.20

6.40

9.00

10.70

21.50

36.40

37.60

49.30

3000

3500

3000

3500

5000

3350

2200

3400

5000

7250

3000

6000

3000

5000

3000

5000

6200

6500

5250

5250

4300

4500

3000

3000

3000

2000

3000

2500

2500

500

500

PET

Pulse Elimination Technique - See

Reflected Wave

.

2-70


Position Loop - Follower

(Electronic Gearing)


General facts about using the Position Loop for follower applications:

1. Parameter 768 [PositReg P Gain] is used for tuning.

2. Parameter 770 [Posit Reg Integ] is normally not needed for position following applications and is disabled by factory default.

3. The number of position counts per revolution depends on the type of feedback device used:

a. When using an encoder for positioning, the drive uses quadrature counts, i.e.,

1024 encoder = 4096 counts per motor revolution.

b. When using a Stegmann absolute hi-resolution encoder, the drive counts

1048576 counts per revolution.

c. When using a Resolver, the drive counts 65536 counts per revolution.

4. Speed regulator tuning directly affects the position loop performance. The speed regulator should be tuned before the position loop.

5. For best performance, positioning should be used with a dynamic brake or regenerative system.

Overview

The position follower feature gives the user the ability to follow the position of a master motor without an external position controller. The position loop adds to or subtracts from the speed reference (using parameter 22 [Speed Trim 2]) to correct for the following error and keep the positions of both encoders locked. The resulting motor speed reference enters the speed regulator loop. Gear ratios can be set up to follow at different rates of speed and position. Typical applications for a geared follower would be for a roller following another part of a machine, and a filler and capper machine for bottling.

The following is a block diagram overview of the position follower mode:

from

Master Encdr

Aux Posit Ref

743

Position Control (2ms)

[ N ]

[ D ]

Gear Rat

+

Position Offset

from

Follower Encdr

Mtr Posit FB

762

Posit Spd Output

318

PI Regulator

Speed Control - Reference (2ms)

Selected Spd Ref

Speed Ref 1

40

10

Spd Ref1 Divide 11

/

S Curve Spd Ref

Linear Ramp

& S Curve

43

from

Master Encdr

Speed Ref 2

12

Spd Ref2 Multi

13

*

Speed Ref

Selection

Speed Ref Sel

16

Speed Trim 2

22

+

Speed Control - Regulator (0.5ms)

Motor Speed Ref

301

from

Follower Encdr

Motor Spd Fdbk

300

PI

Regulator

Spd Reg PI Out

302

Spd Reg P Gain

81

Spd Reg I Gain

Spd Reg BW

82

90


2-71

Speed Reference Selection

For the position following mode to work properly, there needs to be a speed reference to the speed loop of the drive to follow.

Selected Spd Ref

40

Speed Ref 1

Spd Ref1 Divide

10

11

/

Speed Ref

Selection

Speed Ref 2

from

Master Encdr

Spd Ref2 Multi

12

13

*

Speed Ref Sel

16

For example, link parameter 12 [Speed Ref 2] to parameter 241 [Encdr1 Spd Fdbk].

Set parameter 16 [Speed Ref Sel] = 1 "Speed Ref 1". This generates the speed command from the master encoder input. If a gear ratio is used in the position loop, parameter 13 [Spd Ref2 Multi] must be setup to match the gear ratio set in the position loop.

Speed Reference Ramp

The speed reference ramp should be disabled when using the drive as a position follower. To disable the speed reference ramp, set parameter 151 [Logic

Command] bit 0 "SpdRamp Dsbl" = 1.

Enabling the Position Loop

To enable the position loop, set parameter 151 [Logic Command] bit 13

"PositionEnbl" = 1.

Then to allow the output of the position loop to trim the speed set parameter 740

[Position Control] bit 1 "Speed Out En" = 1.

Position Reference Selection

For a position follower application set parameter 742 [Posit Ref Sel] = 1 "Aux

PositRef". This uses counts from a linked source for the position reference to the position loop.

Posit Ref Sel 742

Interp Position

749

Aux PositRef

Pt-Pt Posit Ref

743

758

0

1

2

Selected

Position

Reference

Link parameter 742 [Aux Posit Ref] to the position for the feedback device. For example, link parameter 742 [Aux Posit Ref] to parameter 240 [Encdr1 Position].

Encoder 1 position becomes the position reference for the position loop.

2-72


Setting the EGR (Electronic Gear Ratio) and Speed Reference Scaling

Position reference can be entered in user units by using the EGR scaling.

Parameters 745 [PositRef EGR Mul] and 746 [PositRef EGR Div] are used to scale the position reference.

∑

Accum

744 PositRef EGR Out

Selected position reference

∆

Deriv

PositRef EGR Mul

PositRef EGR Div

745

746

[ N ]

[ D ]

Gear Rat

Geared position reference

Example: In this example the encoders are mounted on the motors. The motors are directly coupled to the load and we want the follower to run at 4 times the speed of the master.

PPRm

PPRf

= 1024 PPR

= 1024 PPR

Ratiof:Ratiom = 4:1 where:

PPRm = the PPR of the master encoder

PPRf = the PPR of the follower encoder

Ratiof:Ratiom = the desired ratio between the follower speed and the master speed

[PositRef EGR Mul]

[PositRef EGR Div]

=

CPRf

CPRm

Ratiof

Ratiom

=

4096

4096

4

1 where:

CPRf = the counts per revolution of the follower feedback device. For an incremental encoder this is 4 times the encoder PPR. For a Stegmann Hi-Res encoder this is

1048576. For a Resolver this is 65536.

CPRm = the counts per revolution of the master encoder. For an incremental encoder this is 4 times the encoder PPR.

For a Stegmann Hi-Res encoder this is 1048576. For a

Resolver this is 65536.

Solving for the lowest common denominator, the 1024s on the top and bottom cancel out so that:

[PositRef EGR Mul]

[PositRef EGR Div]

=

4

1

Therefore, parameter 745 [PositRef EGR Mul] = 4 and parameter 746

[PositRef EGR Div] = 1. This will set up the position loop of the follower to move 4 counts for every 1 count of the master.


2-73

[Spd Ref 2 Multi] is calculated:

[ Spd Ref2 Multi ]

=

Ratiof

Ratiom

=

4

1

=

4

Notice that the encoder PPRs should not be included in the calculation for parameter 13 [Spd Ref2 Multi].

[Spd Ref2 Multi] is rounded to the 4th decimal place. The position loop gear ratios will be exact, so that the follower tracks at 4 times the master's speed.

Position Offset

Offsets can be added to the position reference. Offsets are used to make a correction move to synchronize the follower to the master position.

∆

Deriv

Added to position reference after

EGR

Posit Offset 1

Posit Offset 2

Posit Offset Spd

Position Control

(X Offset Pol)

Position Control

(X Offset Ref)

753

754

755

740 04

740 05

+

Rate Lim

756

Filter

LPass

741 05

Position Status

(X OffRefActl)

There are two offsets, parameters 753 [Posit Offset 1] and 754 [Posit Offset 2]. The offset speed must be entered in parameter 755 [Posit Offset Speed] - if this is left at zero the move will not occur. The position offset must be entered in counts of feedback because it is added to the position reference after the EGR scaling. Offsets must be maintained to keep the position (i.e., if you enter a 300 in the offset the position loop will move 300 counts extra). If you zero the offset command the motor will return to the previous position. When it is necessary to zero the offset after a move without returning to the previous position, set parameter 740 [Position

Control] bit 5 "Xoff ReRef" = 1. Then set the offset value = 0. Then set [Position

Control] bit 5 "Xoff ReRef" = 0. The system will not make an offset move when

[Position Control] bit 5 "Xoff ReRef" is on.

Position Loop Output Limits

Parameter 775 [Xreg Spd LoLim] sets the negative speed limit at which the position regulator will output. The default is set to -10% of the base motor speed.

Parameter 776 [Xreg Spd HiLim] sets the positive speed limit at which the position regulator will output. The default is set to +10% of the base motor speed.

In position follower, the position loop only needs to trim the speed a small amount because the drive is setup to follow the master speed reference. Therefore, [Xreg

Spd LoLim] and [Xreg Spd HiLim] can be left at the defaults.

2-74


Tuning Tips

The speed regulator of the drive must be tuned prior to tuning the Position Loop.

Refer to

Speed PI Regulator of this manual for tips on tuning the speed regulator.

Typically parameter 768 [PositReg P Gain] should be set between 1/5th to 1/3rd of parameter 90 [Spd Reg BW].

Parameter 768 [PositReg P Gain] may be set higher using lead compensation on the

Position Regulator Output. Lead/Lag filtering of the position regulator output is accomplished via the speed trim 2 filter. Set parameters 25 [Strim2 Filt Gain] and

26 [SpdTrim2 Filt BW] so that:

[SpdTrim2 Filt BW]

[Strim2 Filt Gain]

=

[Speed Reg BW]

For example, with parameter 90 [Spd Reg BW] = 40 rad/sec, set parameter 26

[SpdTrim2 Filt BW] = 200 rad/sec and set parameter 25 [Strim2 Filt Gain] = 5. The lead/lag filter will effectively cancel the 1/40 sec lag. This will allow a higher

[PositReg P Gain] for increased stability.

Parameter 770 [PositReg Integ] is the integral gain for the position loop. [PositReg

Integ] can be used but is disabled by default and is normally not needed for position follower applications. To enable [PositReg Integ], set parameter 740 [Position

Control], bit 2 "Integ En" = 1. When [PositReg Integ] is used, parameters 772

[XReg Integ LoLim] and 773 [XReg Integ HiLim] should be set with narrow limits.

Jogging a Position Follower Independent from the Master

v1.xx - When you want to jog the PowerFlex® 700S follower drive independently, turn off parameter 740 [Position Control] bit 1 "Posit Spd Output" to disable the position loop output.

v2.xx - The jog can be performed while the position loop output is enabled.

Position Loop - In Position

Detect

The In Position Detection determines if parameter 769 [Position Error] is within a user defined value. Parameter 769 [Position Error] is the result of parameter 747

[Position Cmmd] - parameter 762 [Mtr Posit Fdbk].

Position Error 769 741 10

Position Status

(In Position)

In Position Detect

In Posit BW

In Posit Dwell

782

783

Parameter 782 [In Posit BW] sets the absolute number of position counts that parameter 769 [Position Error] must be within for parameter 741 [Position Status] bit 10 "In Position" to turn on.

Parameter 783 [In Posit Dwell] sets a delay time in seconds that parameter 769

[Position Error] must be within parameter 782 [In Posit BW] before parameter 741

[Position Status] bit 10 "In Position" turns on.

Position Loop - Point to

Point


2-75


First a few general facts about the Point to Point Position Loop:

1. Uses only parameter 768 [PositReg P Gain] for tuning. Parameter 770 [Posit

Reg Integ] is not used in point to point mode.

2. The number of position counts per revolution depends on the type of feedback device used:

a. When using an encoder for positioning, the drive uses quadrature counts, i.e.,

1024 encoder = 4096 counts per motor revolution.

b. When using a Stegmann absolute hi-resolution encoder, the drive counts

1048576 counts per revolution.

c. When using a Resolver, the drive counts 65536 counts per revolution.

3. Speed regulator tuning directly affects the position loop performance. The speed regulator should be tuned before the position loop.

4. For best performance, positioning should be used with a dynamic brake or regenerative system.

Overview

The Point to Point positioning feature gives the user the ability to position the load without an external position controller. The Point to Point function of the position loop moves from current location to commanded location then holds that position until given a new reference or a stop command. The position loop can be scaled to different units other than feedback counts, i.e., Degrees or Inches. Typical applications for the Point to Point function would be turn-tables and storage retrieval machines.

318

Pt-Pt Posit Ref

758

Reference

Selection

(Mode)

Position

Feedback

Selection

Position Fdbk

762

Posit Ref Sel

742

[ N ]

[ D ]

PositReg P Gain

768

Gear Rat

+

Position

Offset

Proportional Channel

Point to

Point

PI

Regulator

Speed Reference Selection

The speed reference should be set to zero speed when using point to point positioning. For example, set parameter 16 [Speed Ref Sel] = 0 "Zero Speed".

Enabling the Position Loop

To enable the position loop, set parameter 151 [Logic Command] bit 13

"PositionEnbl" = 1.

2-76


Then to allow the output of the position loop to trim the speed set parameter 740

[Position Control] bit 1 "Speed Out En" = 1.

Position Reference Selection

For point to point positioning set parameter 742 [Posit Ref Sel] = 2 "Pt to Pt".

Parameter 758 [Pt-Pt Posit Ref] becomes the reference for the position.

Posit Ref Sel 742

Interp Position

749

Aux PositRef 743

Pt-Pt Posit Ref

758

0

1

2

Selected

Position

Reference

Position Reference Scaling

Position reference can be entered in user units by using the EGR scaling.

Parameters 745 [PositRef EGR Mul] and 746 [PositRef EGR Div] are used to scale the position reference.

Selected position reference

∆

Deriv

PositRef EGR Mul

PositRef EGR Div

745

746

[ N ]

[ D ]

Gear Rat

∑

744 PositRef EGR Out

Accum

Geared position reference

Example: To use degrees of motor revolution for the positioning units, scale as follows:

With a 1024 encoder on the motor, this translates to 4096 counts per revolution quadrature position counts.

Parameter 745 [PositRef EGR Mul] = 4096

Parameter 746 [PositRef EGR Div] = 360

This scaling translates the position reference of 0-360 degrees to

0-4096 position counts. This will allow you to enter degrees of motor rotation for the position reference.


2-77

Position Offset

Offsets can be added to the position reference. Offset are used to make a correction move to sync the follower to the master position.

∆

Deriv

Added to position reference after

EGR

Posit Offset 1

Posit Offset 2

Posit Offset Spd

Position Control

(X Offset Pol)

Position Control

(X Offset Ref)

753

754

755

740 04

740 05

+

Rate Lim

756

Filter

LPass

741 05

Position Status

(X OffRefActl)

There are two offsets, parameters 753 [Posit Offset 1] and 754 [Posit Offset 2]. The offset speed must be entered in parameter 755 [Posit Offset Speed] - if this is left at zero the move will not occur. The position offset must be entered in counts of feedback because it is added to the position reference after the EGR scaling. Offsets must be maintained to keep the position, i.e., if you enter a 300 in the offset the position loop will move 300 counts extra. If you zero the offset command the motor will return to the previous position. When it is necessary to zero the offset after a move without returning to the previous position, set parameter 740 [Position

Control] bit 5 "Xoff ReRef" =1. Then set the offset value = 0. Then set [Position

Control] bit 5 "Xoff ReRef" = 0. The system will not make an offset move when

[Position Control] bit 5 "Xoff ReRef" is on.

Point to Point Acceleration and Deceleration

Parameter 759 [Pt-Pt Accel Time] sets the acceleration time in seconds from zero to base motor speed.

Parameter 760 [Pt-Pt Decel Time] sets the deceleration time in seconds from base motor speed to zero.

The [Pt-Pt Accel Time] and [Pt-Pt Decel Time] are only active in Point to Point mode. The Default = 10 seconds.

Position Loop Output Limits

Parameter 772 [Xreg Spd LoLim] sets the negative speed limit at which the position regulator will output. The default is set to -10% of the base motor speed. Set this to the negative speed at which you want the drive to run for point to point moves.

Parameter 773 [Xreg Spd HiLim] sets the positive speed limit at which the position regulator will output. The default is set to +10% of the base motor speed. Set this to the positive speed at which you want the drive to run for point to point moves.

Tuning Tips

The speed regulator of the drive must be tuned prior to tuning the Position Loop.

Refer to

Speed PI Regulator of this manual for tips on tuning the speed regulator.

2-78


Do not attempt to set the accel/decel rates of the point to point position loop faster than can be accomplished by the system. Attempting to set the accel/decel rates faster than the system can handle will cause instability in the position loop. Do not attempt to operate beyond the torque limits of the drive motor combination.

Typically parameter 768 [PositReg P Gain] should be set between 1/5th to 1/3rd of parameter 90 [Spd Reg BW].

Parameter 768 [PositReg P Gain] may be set higher using lead compensation on the

Position Regulator Output. Lead/Lag filtering of the position regulator output is accomplished via the speed trim 2 filter. Set parameters 25 [Strim2 Filt Gain] and

26 [SpdTrim2 Filt BW] so that:

[SpdTrim2 Filt BW]

[Strim2 Filt Gain]

[Speed Reg BW]

For example, with parameter 90 [Spd Reg BW] = 40 rad/sec, set parameter 26

[SpdTrim2 Filt BW] = 200 rad/sec and set parameter 25 [Strim2 Filt Gain] = 5. The lead/lag filter will effectively cancel the 1/40 sec lag. This will allow a higher

[PositReg P Gain] for increased stability.

Parameter 761 [Pt-Pt Filt BW] sets the bandwidth of a low pass filter which affects smoothness at the start of deceleration in point to point mode. A high filter bandwidth will produce a more square deceleration torque, one with a higher level of jerk. Typical values are 5 to 100 (rad/sec). A zero value will bypass the filter. Too high of a value in [Pt-Pt Filt BW] will cause unstable operation at the end of the move. The Default = 25 rad/sec.

Jogging

When you want to jog the PowerFlex® 700S, turn off parameter 740 [Position

Control] bit 1 - "Speed Out En" to disable the position loop output.

Point to Point Re-Reference

Parameter 740 [Position Control] bit 10 "Pt-Pt ReRef" allows the user to perform a position redefine when active. When this bit is set, the position reference in parameter 758 [Pt-Pt Posit Ref] can be changed to the position value desired for the current location. This can be used as a home zero setup by moving the load to the home position.

Example: Set parameter 740 [Position Control] bit 10 - "Pt-Pt ReRef" = 1. Then set parameter 758 [Pt-Pt Posit Ref] =0. Also if [Pt-Pt Posit Ref] is set to a different number, that will become the new position value. After setting [Pt-Pt Posit Ref] to the desired value, set [Position Control] bit

10 "Pt-Pt ReRef" = 0.

Position Loop - Registration

The PowerFlex

®

700S drive has the ability to capture the feedback position upon an event occurrence. There are two registration registers that can be configured. You may also see DriveLogix Motion instruction Motion Arm Registration (MAR).


2-79

Port 0 Example

Sequence of events:

Registration for Port 0 is configured using the parameters below. After configuration the Registration latch is armed. After the registration event occurs, the Found bit will be turned on. This indicates that the position of the event has been trapped in the Registration Latch parameter.

• P235 [Port0 Regis Ltch] Displays the captured position after the event occurs.

• P236 [Port0 Regis Cnfg] Configures the Registration event.

0

1

Encoder Selection

Bit 0

0

0

Trigger Source

Bit 2 Bit 1

0

1

1

1

0

0

1

1

0

1

Edge Selection Settings

Bit 4 Bit 3

0

1

0

1

1

1

0

0

Trigger Source

Bit 6 Bit 5

0

1

0

1

Description

Select Encoder0 to trap position

Select Encoder1 to trap position

Description

Digital Input 1 and Encoder 0 Z phase

Digital Input 3 ( Default setting)

Digital Input 2

Encoder 0 Z phase

Description

Capture on Rising Edge

Capture on Falling Edge

Capture on Both Edges

Disable Capture

Description

Disable Capture

Capture during Reverse Rotation

Capture during Forward Rotation

Capture during either Rotation

Filter Settings

Bit

11 10 9 8 Input Filter Setting

0 0 0 0 Filter disabled

0 0 0 1 100 ns filter

0 0 1 0 200 ns filter

0 0 1 1 300 ns filter

0 0 1 1 300 ns filter

0 1 0 0 400 ns filter

0 1 0 1 500 ns filter

0 1 1 0 600 ns filter

0 1 1 1 700 ns filter

1 0 0 0 800 ns filter (default setting)

1 0 0 1 900 ns filter

1 0 1 0 1000 ns filter

1 0 1 1 1100 ns filter

1 1 0 0 1200 ns filter

1 1 0 1 1300 ns filter

1 1 1 0 1400 ns filter

1 1 1 1 1500 ns filter

2-80


P237 [Port0 Regis Ctrl] Configures control for Port 0 Registration.

Setting Bit 0 = 1 is the arm request to capture the position on the next trigger event.

Setting Bit 1 = 1 is the disarm request to capture on the next trigger event.

P238 [Port0 Regis Stat] Port 0 Registration Status

Bit 0 [Armed] indicates the registration latch is armed and waiting for a trigger.

Bit 1 [Found] indicates the registration event has occurred and the value is stored in

P235 [Port0 Regis Ltch].

Position Loop - Position

Watch

The position watch is used to determine when the position feedback reaches a user defined value. There are two (2) position watches in the PowerFlex® 700S.

Position Actual

763 Link

Posit Detct1 In

784 741 08

Position Status

(Posit Watch1)

Position Control

(X Watch 1 En)

(X Watch 1 Dir)

740 16

740 17

Position Watch 1

PositDetct1 Stpt 780

Parameter 784 [Posit Detct1 In] sets the position feedback that you would like to watch. By default, [Posit Detct1 In] is linked to parameter 763 [Position Actual].

Note: In order for the value in parameter 763 [Position Actual] to change the firmware function for the position loop must be turned on by setting parameter 147

[FW Functions En] bit 16 "Position Ctrl" = 1 and the position loop must be enabled by setting parameter 151 [Logic Command] bit 13 "Position En" = 1.

Parameter 780 [PositDetct1 Stpt] is used to set the position set point for which to watch.

Setting parameter 740 [Position Control] bit 17 "X Watch 1 Dir" = 1 causes the drive to detect when the position feedback becomes greater than the set point.

Setting [Position Control] bit 17 "X Watch 1 Dir" = 0 causes the drive to detect when the position feedback becomes less than the set point.

Setting parameter 740 [Position Control] bit 16 "X Watch 1 En" = 1 enables the position detection function to detect the next position. Setting [Position Control] bit

16 "X Watch 1 En" = 0 resets position detection.

Setting parameter 741 [Position Status] bit 8 "Posit Watch1" = 1 indicates that the position set point has been passed.

Example:

• Set parameter 147 [FW Functions En] bit 22 "PosWtch/Dtct" = 1.

• Link parameter 784 [Posit Detct1 In] to parameter 240 [Encdr1 Position].

• Set parameter 780 [PositDetct1 Stpt] = 100000 counts.

• Set parameter 740 [Position Control] bit 17 "X Watch 1 Dir" = 1.

• Set parameter 740 [Position Control] bit 16 "X Watch 1 En" = 1.

• When parameter 240 [Encdr1 Position] becomes greater than 100000 counts, parameter 741 [Position Status] bit 8 "Posit Watch1" is set to 1. Note that the position must pass 100000 counts. If the motor position is already past 100000 counts when the position watch is enabled, the position watch status bit will not detect the position until 100000 counts is passed again.

• Set parameter 740 [Position Control] bit 16 "X Watch 1 En" = 0 to reset parameter 741 [Position Status] bit 8 "Posit Watch1" to 0.


2-81

Power Loss/Ride Through

The precharge function provides a current limited charging of the drive's bus capacitor(s) and, when charging is complete, bypasses the current limiting device.

This current limited charging primarily protects the drive's input fuses and front-end rectifiers (or SCRs) from excessive inrush current. The bypass function is needed for normal drive operation to avoid overloading the current limiting device.

In general, when precharge is active, the current limiting device is in circuit and when precharge is done the bypass device is active (see exceptions below).

The ride through function can provide a motor coast, precharge and auto-restart sequence of operation in the event of an input power dropout (power loss and return). First the drive stops PWM operation "coasting the motor" and saving any remaining power stored in the drive's bus capacitor(s) for extended control logic operating time. Next, the precharge function limits the drive's inrush current in the event that the incoming power to the drive is restored. Last, after the power is restored and the precharge has completed, ride through allows the drive to continue normal operation, applying power to the motor again. This operation is intended to protect the drive from excessive inrush currents in the presence of input AC line disturbances and allows the drive to continue normal operation without user intervention. However, there is also a concern for safe auto-restart operation. By default the drive is configured to fault and not auto-restart if the power line dropout lasts more than two seconds.

!

ATTENTION: The user must determine safe auto-restart and fault configuration at the system and user level. Incorrect selection(s) may result in personal injury due to machine motion.

Precharge Frames 1 through 4

The precharge implementation and control varies with drive size and type. For frames 1 through 4 the precharge hardware is located on the power circuit board.

This is basically a resistor and bypass relay in series with the positive DC bus between the front-end rectifier and the bus capacitor. The bypass relay control is described below. Also note that these drives can be wired for either AC line power or DC common bus. The precharge function will work the same for either AC or

DC power input.

Precharge Frames 5 and Higher AC Input "Stand Alone Drives"

For frames 5 and higher (AC Input) the precharge function is implemented with an

SCR rectifier such that the SCRs are phase advanced to limit the inrush current into the bus capacitor(s). This phase advanced precharge is not controlled by the drive and should normally be completed by the minimum precharge time required by the drive. The drive will not complete precharge until the bus voltage is stable and above the under voltage level.

Precharge Frames 5 and Higher DC Input "Common Bus Drives"

There are two versions of these DC Input or common bus drives. The first has a resistor with an SCR bypass in series with the positive DC bus in front of the bus capacitor. The second does not have any precharge hardware and is intended for user applications where the precharge hardware and control is provided by the user.

Drives with the resistor and SCR bypass (internal) have the same precharge control as frame 1-4 above.

2-82


!

ATTENTION: In cases where the user is providing the precharge hardware and control incorrect configuration and/or control may result in drive damage.

Ride Through Operation

An incoming power loss to the drive is detected by a 22% volt drop in bus voltage or a bus voltage that drops below the under voltage level. The return of incoming power is detected by an 11% rise in bus voltage and a bus voltage level greater than the undervoltage level set in parameter 409 [Line Undervolts]. If the undervoltage condition is selected as a fault, parameter 393 [BusUndervoltCnfg], then the drive will not restart if the incoming power returns. Upon sensing a power loss the drive can be configured to coast, continue operation or change to flux only operation.

(See

Ride Through Configuration

below).

408 Power Loss Level

Sets the bus voltage level at which ride-through begins and modulation ends. When bus voltage falls below this level, the drive prepares for an automatic reset. Enter a percentage of the bus voltage derived from the high voltage setting for the voltage class

For example: on a 400-480V drive,

Units:

Default:

Min/Max:

× ×

2

=

150Vdc

%

22.1

15/95

✓ 16-bit

Integer

In cases where the precharge control is independent or external to the drive

(firmware) the ride through function can still be used to stop PWM operation saving controller power and restart operation after the return of power is sensed. In this case ride through sequence will not be directly coordinated with the precharge operation. For external precharge hardware functionality is provided so that the user may provide coordinated operation.

Ride Through Configuration

The drive's response to a power disturbance can be selected in parameter 406

[Power Loss Mode].

Settings for Parameter 406 [Power Loss Mode]:

2

3

0

1

4

5

Coast

Reserved

Continue

Reserved

Reserved

Flux Only

Coast (default): The coast mode stops power to the motor (PWM disabled) and the motor coasts until power returns or a fault occurs. At the time when the motor

PWM is disabled the precharge device bypass (where controlled by the drive) is also opened. Then the precharge logic is reset so that the drive starts another precharge cycle. After the incoming power returns and the precharge cycle has completed, the drive restarts normal operation.

Continue: Disables the ride through function and will attempt to continue running if the incoming power is disrupted. If the power returns before the drive has shut down, the precharge device will be bypassed and a large inrush current may occur.

In this case, drive damage is likely if the inrush current is large.


2-83

Flux Only: The drive's torque is set to zero when a power disturbance is detected.

The motor flux is continued until the disturbance goes away or until a power down occurs (extended power loss). If the power loss is of a very short duration or there is sufficient input impedance to limit the inrush current when power returns, the drive will continue normal operation after the disturbance passes. However, if the power returns causing a large inrush current (precharge device is still bypassed) drive damage is likely.

Ride Through Timeout Fault

Parameter 407 [Power Loss Time] sets the duration or time delay allowed for the incoming power to return before a ride through fault occurs. This limits the time where an auto-start for the drive could occur. The default value for this time is 2 seconds with a minimum value of 0 seconds and a maximum value of 60 seconds.

The ride through timeout fault is shown in Parameter 321 [Exception Event2] bit 8

"RidethruTime." The ride through timeout fault will inhibit the drive auto start function requiring a fault clear and commanded start to run the drive again.

!

ATTENTION: The user must determine the safe time that will be allowed for the drive to auto-start.

Precharge Operation

The drive will not run until the controller's precharge function has completed. Also, the precharge function in the drive runs independent of drive precharge hardware

(for the most part) and the hardware control. The drive will not restart precharge any time that the drive is running (see ride through above). The drive control is in precharge (or bus capacitor charging mode) any time that the precharge is not

"done" (see parameter 555 [MC Status] bit 11 “PreChrg Done”). This is independent of whether or not the drive control actually controls the precharge hardware.

For the control to complete precharge and allow drive enable (See Parameter 156

[Run Inhibit Stat]), the following conditions must be met:

1. A user-controlled precharge enable must be present. The precharge enable can be provided by hardware input or parameter configuration. This selection is determined by the setting of parameter 838 [Digin1 Sel]. When parameter 838 is set to 14 "PreChrg/Disc" then the hardware precharge control is selected and digital input 1 controls the user precharge enable. If parameter 838 is set to any other value (i.e., not set to 14) then the control uses parameter 411 [PreChrg

Control], as the source for the precharge enable. In this case, when [PreChrg

Control] is set to zero, the precharge control is disabled (held in precharge) and the drive is inhibited from running (see parameter 156 [Run Inhibit Stat]).

Otherwise when [PreChrg Control] is set to one the user precharge is enabled.

Using a Digital Input for the precharge enable is recommended for common bus systems where a drive may be disconnected and reconnected to the common bus system. The Digital Input should be connected through an auxiliary contact on the cabinet disconnect switch. Failure to provide a hardware disconnect precharge control may lead to very large inrush currents and associated drive damage if a reconnection is made before the drive can sense the power loss. This precharge enable provides a user-controlled permissive to the precharge function.

2-84


PreChrg

Selection (P838) select = 14

PreChrg/Disc (14)

Digital Input #1

PreChrg Control (P411)

1=Enable, 0 = Hold PreChrg

1 select not = 14

Ride Through Active

Enabled (PWM Active)

Bus Voltage Stable

Low Bus Voltage

2. The drive must not be in an undervoltage condition. Parameter 409 [Line

Undervolts], sets the under voltage level as a percent of drive rated volts, parameter 401 [Rated Volts]. An undervoltage is detected by comparing the parameter 306 [DC Bus Voltage] to the percent of line voltage set in parameter

409 [Line Undervolts] times parameter 401 [Rated Volts] times the square root of 2. The undervoltage condition is displayed in parameter 555 [MC Status] bit

15 "DC Bus Low".

3. The drive bus voltage must be stable (not rising). The bus voltage stable condition is determined by comparing the bus voltage to a filtered value of the bus voltage. Initially when power is applied to the drive the bus voltage will rise as determined by the limited current controlled by the precharge device. The filtered value of bus voltage will lag behind the actual bus voltage until the bus capacitor charging is complete, then the values will converge. A difference between the filtered and actual bus voltage determines if the bus voltage is stable.

4. The drive must not be running (PWM active), except in coordination with ride through. After the initial drive precharge has completed, a power loss may present conditions for precharge to be restarted (ex. low bus voltage). However, if the drive output is active (parameter 155 [Logic Status], bit 0 "Enabled"), the restart of precharge will be inhibited until the drive is stopped (PWM not active). Also refer to

Power Loss/Ride Through

for controller coordinated PWM disable and precharge operation. If the drive is running and the user removes the precharge enable, this condition will be ignored until the drive is disabled

(PWM stops). Then the precharge function will be started again.

5. The drive precharge delay must be completed. After conditions 1 through 4 above are met, parameter 472 [PreCharge Delay] must be completed before the precharge device bypass is commanded. If any of the above conditions become false during the precharge delay period, the delay timer is reset. If parameter

472 [PreCharge Delay] is set less than 200 msec then an internal 200 msec delay is used. Parameter 472 [PreCharge Delay] has a calculated maximum value based on parameter 410 [PreChrg TimeOut]; [PreCharge Delay] = [PreChrg

TimeOut] - 1.0 second. (Also see precharge staging for common and shared bus drives below).

Precharge Control Functional Diagram

Precharge Request

S

SET

Q

R

CLR

Q

PreCharge Delay Timer

(P472)

Precharge Done

(P555 bit 11)

S SET Q

R

CLR

Q

Reset


2-85

Precharge Timeout Fault

The precharge control logic has an associated precharge timeout fault to alert the user if the precharge is not completed within the timeout period. Parameter

381[PreChrg Err Cnfg], provides the configuration control for the precharge timeout fault. Parameter 410 [PreChrgTimeout] sets the period or delay for this timeout fault (default = 30 seconds). The timeout timer is not started until the user requests a precharge either through the hardware input (Digital Input 1) or through parameter 411 [PreChrg Control]. The precharge timeout fault is intended only to alert the user that there may be a problem in the precharge control. The precharge fault, for the most part, does not affect the precharge operation. As conditions would change to complete or restart precharge, the precharge control will function as described above independent of whether or not a precharge timeout fault has occurred.

If the drive does not complete precharge due to an unstable bus voltage, then after the precharge timeout period the precharge control will complete precharge providing all of other conditions for precharge are met. This control is based on the precharge timeout status and independent of whether or not the precharge timeout is configured as a fault, warning or none. This feature could be useful in cases where bus disturbances are created by another drive in a common or shared bus installation.

Settings for parameter 381 [PreChrg Err Cnfg]:

"0 "Ignore": This disables the precharge timeout fault. With this setting the drive ignores condition 3 above so that the drive does not check for an unstable bus voltage. Then after the precharge timeout period the precharge control will complete precharge providing all of the other conditions for precharge are met. This feature could be useful in cases where bus disturbances are created by another drive in a common or shared bus installation.

"1 "Alarm": If the precharge does not complete within the timeout period, the drive does not fault, but it sets an alarm bit in parameter 326 [Alarm Status 1] bit 30

"Precharge Er".

"2 "FltCoastStop": This is the factory default setting. If the precharge does not complete within the timeout period, the drive faults and disables the PWM output.

External Precharge

In cases where the user must provide external drive precharge hardware and control, the user should consider the current limit necessary to protect the drive and fuses, the breaking capability of the precharge device, the regenerative capability of the drive/system, whether or not ride through control will be accommodated, impedance isolation that may be needed between drives, braking requirements and sharing between drives and the power disconnect operation in a system. The drive's precharge and ride through functions will still run even though the actual precharge hardware is not controlled by the drive. The drive's enable (parameter 155 [Logic

Status], bit 0 "Enabled"), precharge enable (controlled with a digital input or parameter 411 [PreChrg Control]) and precharge done (parameter 555 [MC Status] bit 11 "PreChrg Done") parameters are available for the external precharge/ride through control in cases where the users would like to provide coordinated operation between the external precharge and the drive's ride through operation.

2-86


Precharge Staging

Parameter 472 [PreCharge Delay] can be used in conjunction with precharge enable

(see 1 above) to coordinate the precharge operation of a group of drives. Typical uses may include common bus or shared bus applications. The precharge coordination can be open loop, using different precharge delay times or could be closed loop by monitoring the precharge done status (parameter 555 bit 11) of each drive before the next drive in the sequence is enabled for precharge. The maximum value for PreCharge Delay is limited by parameter 410 [PreChrg Timeout]. The maximum value for [Precharge Delay] is determined by the following calculation:

[Precharge Delay] Max = [PreChrg Timeout] - 1.

Motor Sim Mode

When the motor simulation mode is selected the precharge requirements are ignored and the precharge done condition is not needed for running the drive.

External Power Supply

If the drive is used with an external power supply, the user should not request a precharge until the drive incoming power is available. If the user does request a precharge without incoming drive power a precharge timeout fault will occur (if configured for a fault).

Note: The default for parameter 838 [DigIn 1 Sel] has changed from the value of 14

"PreChrg/Disc" to 0 (none) in firmware release version 1.17 and later.

Preset Speeds

There are no “Preset Speed” parameters. However, the Speed Reference parameters can be used as set speeds. See the

Speed Reference for more information.

Process PI Loop

The drive has a process PI loop that can be used to trim speed, torque, or some other function.

Logic Status

(Running)

Logic Command

(ProcsTrim En)

155 1

151 12

&

Logic Ctrl State

(ProcsTrim En)

157 31

PI Command

(Enable)

183 00

OR

PI Reference

PI Feedback

181

182

+

-

PI Lpass Filt BW

184

Filter

LPass kp

P Gain

186

PI Prop Gain ki s

I Gain PI Preload

PI Integ Time

185

187

PI Integ HLim

PI Integ LLim

188

189

Limit

+

PI High Limit

PI Lower Limit

191

192

190

PI Integ Output

Limit

0

0

1

PI Output

180


2-87

Process PI Reference and Feedback

The reference and feedback signals are the values present in [PI Reference] and [PI

Feedback]. [PI Reference] could be a set value or linked to a variable parameter such as an analog input. Typically [PI Feedback] is linked to an analog input value received from a process line transducer.

The reference and feedback values are compared and an error signal is created. This error signal is sent to a low pass filter. The filter bandwidth is set by [PI Lpass Filt

BW] in radian/second. The output of the filter is sent to the process PI regulator.

Process PI Regulator

[PI Preload] presets the process time. When the PI Output is enabled, the integral term of the process regulator will be preset to start [PI Output] at the value set in [PI

Preload].

[PI Integ Time] is the integral term for the regulator. It is in units of 1/seconds. For example, when the [PI Integ Time] is 2, the integrator output equals 1 per unit in 1 second for 1 per unit error. 1 per unit means 100%.

The output of the integrator is limited by [PI Integ Hlim] and [PI Integ Llim]. {PI

Integ Hlim] is in per unit and has a range from 0 to 8. A value of 1 for [PI Integ

Hlim] can represent base motor speed, rated motor torque, or 100% of some external function.

The output of the integrator after the integrator limits can be viewed in [PI Integ

Output].

The [PI Prop Gain] sets the proportional gain of the regulator. For example, when

[PI Prop Gain] is 2, the output of the proportional block will equal 2 per unit in 1 second for a 1per unit error.

The output of the integrator, [PI integ Output], and the output of the proportional block are summed together.

Process PI Limits

To prevent the regulator output from exceeding a range, an upper and lower limit can be programmed.

[PI High Limit] sets the high limit for the [PI Output] signal. [PI High Limit] is in per unit and has a range from 0 to 8. A value of 1 for [PI High Limit] can represent base motor speed, rated motor torque, or 100% of some external function.

Process PI Output

At this point of the process PI loop, some conditions must be met to turn on the PI output (otherwise the PI output is 0).

The PI output can be turned on in one of two ways:

1. [Logic Command] bit 12 - “ProcsTrim En” is turned on and the drive is running.

The running state is indicated by [Logic Status] bit 1. When both of these conditions are true, [Logic Ctrl State] bit 31 “ProcessTrim En” will be on.

2. [PI Command] bit 0 - “Enable” is turned on.

2-88


Reflected Wave

Now the PI output is used to trim speed, torque, or some external loop.

To trim the speed loop, link [Speed Trim 2] or [Speed Trim 3] to [PI Output].

To trim the torque loop, link [Torque Trim] to the [PI Output].

To trim some other loop, link the desired parameter to [PI Output]. For example, to use analog output 1 as a trim signal to other equipment, link [Anlg Out 1 Real] to

[PI Output].

Parameter 510 [FOC Mode Config] bit 9 “ReflWaveComp” enables reflected wave compensation.

The pulses from a Pulse Width Modulation (PWM) inverter using IGBTs are very short in duration (50 nanoseconds to 1 millisecond). These short pulse times combined with the fast rise times (50 to 400 nanoseconds) of the

IGBT, will result in excessive over-voltage transients at the motor.

Voltages in excess of twice the DC bus voltage (650V DC nominal at 480V input) will occur at the motor and can cause motor winding failure.

The patented reflected wave correction software in the PowerFlex® 700S will reduce these over-voltage transients from a VFD to the motor. The correction software modifies the PWM modulator to prevent PWM pulses less than a minimum time from being applied to the motor. The minimum time between PWM pulses is 10 microseconds. The modifications to the

PWM modulator limit the over-voltage transient to 2.25 per unit volts line-to-line peak at 600 feet of cable.

400 V Line = 540V DC bus x 2.25 = 1215V

480 V Line = 650V DC bus x 2.25 = 1463V

600 V Line = 810V DC bus x 2.25 = 1823 V

The software is standard and requires no special parameters or settings.

500

V/div

0

<T

α

1670 Vpk

Inverter

Motor

500

V/div

0

0 5 10 15 20 25 30

Time (µsec)

35 40 45 50

The above figure shows the inverter line-to-line output voltage (top trace) and the motor line-to-line voltage (bottom trace) for a 10 HP, 460V AC inverter, and an unloaded 10 HP AC induction motor at 60 Hz operation.

500 ft. of #12 AWG cable connects the drive to the motor.


2-89

Initially, the cable is in a fully charged condition. A transient disturbance occurs by discharging the cable for approximately 4ms. The propagation delay between the inverter terminals and motor terminals is approximately

1ms. The small time between pulses of 4ms does not provide sufficient time to allow the decay of the cable transient. Thus, the second pulse arrives at a point in the motor terminal voltage's natural response and excites a motor over-voltage transient greater than 2 pu. The amplitude of the double pulsed motor over-voltage is determined by a number of variables. These include the damping characteristics of the cable, bus voltage, and the time between pulses, the carrier frequency, modulation technique, and duty cycle.

The plot below shows the per unit motor overvoltage as a function of cable length. This is for no correction versus the modulation correction code for varied lengths of #12 AWG cable to 600 feet for 4 and 8 kHz carrier frequencies. The output line-to-line voltage was measured at the motor terminals in 100 feet increments.

No Correction vs Correction Method at 4 kHz and 8 kHz Carrier

Frequencies - Vbus = 650, fe = 60 Hz

2.6

2.5

2.4

2.3

2.2

2.1

2

1.9

1.8

1.7

1.6

0

No Correction 4 kHz Carrier

Corrected 4 kHz Carrier

No Correction 8 kHz Carrier

Corrected 8 kHz Carrier

100 200 300 400

Cable Length (Feet)

500 600

Without the correction, the overvoltage increases to unsafe levels with increasing cable length for both carrier frequencies.

The patented modulation correction code reduces the overvoltage for both carrier frequencies and maintains a relatively flat overvoltage level for increasing cable lengths beyond 300 feet.

To determine the maximum recommended motor cable lengths for a particular drive refer to

Cable, Motor Lengths

.

Refer to

http://www.ab.com/support/abdrives/documentation/index.html

for detailed technical papers.

2-90


Remote I/O Adapter

(20-COMM-R)

This serves as a supplement to the PowerFlex Remote I/O Adapter Users Manual, publication 20COMM-UM004 addressing items specific to the PowerFlex® 700S.

Please refer to the User Manual for details on 20-COMM-R set-up, configuration, rack configurations, and block transfers.

General facts about the 20-COMM-R (refer to Chapter 4 of the PowerFlex Remote

I/O Adapter Users Manual for details):

1. Remote I/O (RIO) is based on 16-bit integer values

2. Can only be configured as a ¼ or ½ rack. When configured as a ¼ rack, the reference and feedback are transmitted through block transfer I/O. When configured as a ½ rack, the reference and feedback are transmitted through discrete I/O. See Chapter 4 of the 20-COMM-R User Manual for examples of programming the discrete and block transfer I/O.

3. Datalinks are transferred to and from the drive by block transfer I/O.

ControlLogix System

Here is the I/O image table for the ControlLogix system and a 20-COMM-R configured as a ¼ rack. Notice that the first 2 words of the image table are Discrete

I/O, the rest of the data comes across as Block Transfer I/O.

ControlLogix

Outp

O.Data[0] INT

O.Data[1] INT

BT_Out[0] INT

BT_Out[1] INT

BT_Out[2] INT

BT_Out[3] INT

BT_Out[4] INT

BT_Out[5] INT

BT_Out[6] INT

BT_Out[7] INT

BT_Out[8] INT

BT_Out[9] INT

BT_Out[1 INT

BT_Out[1 INT

BT_Out[1 INT

BT_Out[1 INT

BT_Out[1 INT

BT_Out[1 INT

BT_Out[1 INT

BT_Out[1 INT

RIO

Adapter

2 Reference

3 Reference

DPI

PowerFlex 700S

P707 Data In A1 Int

P708 Data In A1

P709 Data In A2 Int

P710 Data In A2

P711 Data In B1 Int

P712 Data In B1

713 Data In B2 Int

P714 Data In B2

P715 Data In C1 Int

P716 Data In C1

P717 Data In C2 Int

P718 Data In C2

P719 Data In D1 Int

P720 Data In D1

P721 Data In D2 Int

P722 Data In D2

1 The speed reference comes into the 20-COMM-R as (2) 16 bit integers. The PowerFlex® 700S firmware automatically converts that speed reference into floating point, so that parameter 20 [Speed Ref DPI] is a floating-point value.


2-91

RIO

DPI

ControlLogix Adapter PowerFlex 700S

Outp

O.Data[0] INT

O.Data[1] INT

BT_Out[0] INT

BT_Out[1] INT

BT_Out[2] INT

BT_Out[3] INT

BT_Out[4] INT

BT_Out[5] INT

BT_Out[6] INT

BT_Out[7] INT

BT_Out[8] INT

BT_Out[9] INT

BT_Out[1 INT

BT_Out[1 INT

BT_Out[1 INT

BT_Out[1 INT

BT_Out[1 INT

BT_Out[1 INT

BT_Out[1 INT

BT_Out[1 INT

2 Reference

3 Reference

2

P72 Scaled Spd Fdbk

P724 Data Out A1

P725 Data Out A1

P726 Data Out A2

P727 Data Out A2

P728 Data Out B1

P729 Data Out B1

P730 Data Out B2

P731 Data Out B2

P732 Data Out C1

P733 Data Out C1

P734 Data Out C2

P735 Data Out C2

P736 Data Out D1

P737 Data Out D1

P738 Data Out D2

P739 Data Out D2

BT Message

Source and Destination

Tags

Message

Buffer

Message

Handler

1 Bits 0-15 only of parameter 155 [Logic Status] appear in the Input Image table of the ControlLogix controller.

2 The speed feedback sent from the PowerFlex® 700S to the 20-COMM-R is not affected by parameter 73 [Spd

Fdbk Scale]. Furthermore, the PowerFlex 700S automatically converts parameter 72 [Scaled Spd Fdbk], which is a floating-point parameter, to an integer format before the value is transferred to the 20-COMM-R.

When the 20-COMM-R is configured as a ½ rack, the Reference and Feedback values become words 2 and 3 in the Discrete I/O. The mapping for the Datalinks sent over block transfer I/O stays the same. Words 0 and 1 in the block transfer I/O become buffers.

The following example shows the message instructions for the block transfer I/O.

In this example, the 20-COMM-R was setup as a ¼ rack.

2-92


For the block transfer I/O write, the source tag RIO_700S_BT_O must be an array of 18 INTs. This tag cannot be DINT. The source tag will contain the speed reference data and the data sent to the Data In parameters of the drive.

The "Path" in the communication tab of the block transfer I/O write is the name of the DH+/RIO scanner module. The "Module Address" sets the channel of the DH+/

RIO scanner used, and the rack, group and slot of the 20-COMM-R.


2-93

For the block transfer I/O read, the destination tag RIO_700S_BT_I must be an array of 18 INTs. The tag cannot be DINT. The destination tag will contain the speed feedback data and data from the Data Out parameters of the drive.

The communication tab of the block transfer I/O read is setup the same as the block transfer I/O write.


Because the PowerFlex® 700S is based on 32-bit and floating-point parameters, some special data handling is required when using Remote I/O.

To setup the PowerFlex 700S to follow a speed reference from the 20-COMM-R, parameter 691 [DPI Ref Select] must be set to “Port 5.” Parameter16 [Speed Ref

Sel] must be set to “Speed Ref DPI.”


Use the following logic to transmit and receive reference and feedback data as integer data.

Transmitted Reference (counts)

=

[Floating point Reference (RPM)

×

[

Base motor RPM

]

Speed Reference Via Remote I/O to a PowerFlex 700S using a 20-COMM-R module.

The first move instruction is only for visual indication of the speed reference.

Calculate the reference as a DINT based on 32768 = base motor speed.

Then copy the DINT into 2, 16 bit tags sent over Remote I/O.

MOV

Move

Source RIO_700S_Ref_RPM

1765.0

Dest RIO_700S_Ref_RPM

1765.0

CPT

Compute

Dest RIO_700S_Ref_DINT

32768

Expression (RIO_700S_Ref_RPM/RIO_700S_Base_Motor_Speed)*32768

Copy File

COP

Source RIO_700S_Ref_DINT

Dest RIO_700S_BT_0[0]

Length 2

2-94


Floating point Feedback (RPM)

=

×

------------------------------------------


To read datalinks, the bits in parameter 723 [Dlink OutDataTyp] must be set appropriately for each Datalink to select whether the data is floating point or DINT.

Because the datalinks are transmitted and received through block transfers, the data type in the controller is limited to 16-bit integers. To write or read floating point or

32-bit integers the COP (copy) instruction must be utilized. The copy instruction in

ControlLogix performs a bitwise copy. Set the length of the copy instruction to a value appropriate for the destination data type.

For example:

1. When copying a floating-point value into an integer register, the length will be

2. A single precision IEEE floating-point value uses 32-bits. This means (2)

16-bit integers are required to properly transmit the data.

2. When copying (2) integer values (the low and high word of 32-bit data) into a floating-point register, the length will be 1.

Explicit Block Transfer Messaging

Explicit block transfer messaging is used to configure the drive and monitor data from the drive. This type of block transfer is different than the block transfer used to transmit and receive datalinks. Chapter 5 of the 20-COMM-R User Manual shows the format of the block transfer request and response data in ControlLogix.

The following example shows the message instructions for the explicit block transfer message write and read.


2-95

For the block transfer message write, the source tag RIO_BT_Request_Data must be an array of 20, 30, or 60 INTs (depending on how much data the user wants to send in the message). This tag cannot be DINT.

The "Path" in the communication tab of the block transfer message write is the name of the DH+/RIO scanner module. The "Module Address" sets the channel of the DH+/RIO scanner used, and the rack, group and slot of the 20-COMM-R.

2-96


For the block transfer message read, the destination tag RIO_BT_Response_Data must be an array of 20, 30, or 60 INTs (depending on how much data the user is receiving). This tag cannot be DINT.

The communication tab of the block transfer message read is setup the same as the block transfer message write.

The block transfer messages on RIO are limited to 16-bit integers. Therefore, 32 bit parameters are split into 16 bit integers in the block transfer request and response data. In order to write or read floating point or 32-bit integers the COP (copy) instruction must be utilized. The copy instruction in ControlLogix performs a bitwise copy. Set the length of the copy instruction to a value appropriate for the destination data type.

For example:

3. When copying a floating-point value into an integer register, the length will be

2. A single precision IEEE floating-point value uses 32-bits. These means (2)

16-bit integers are required to properly transmit the data.

4. When copying (2) integer values (the low and high word of 32-bit data) into a floating-point register, the length will be 1.

SLC/PLC-5 System


The reference is scaled so that base motor speed = 32768. The SLC/PLC-5 does not use DINT, and only handle 16 bit integers, so the reference has to be handled differently to account for references above 32767 or below -32768. The following example shows how to transmit references less than twice base motor speed, but does not show the logic for the block transfer I/O messages. See Chapter 4 of the

20-COMM-R User Manual for an example program for the block transfer I/O messages.


2-97

0000

0001

Calculate a speed reference based on 32768 = base motor speed.

F12:0 = 32 bit floating point speed reference (counts)

F12:1 = speed reference (RPM)

F12:4 = base motor speed (RPM)

CPT

Compute

Dest F12:0

Convert the 32 bit floating point speed reference into 2, 16 bit intergers to send over RIO.

F12:0 = 32 bit floating point speed reference (counts)

N10:10 = LSW of speed reference to send over RIO (counts)

N10:11 = MSW of speed reference to send over RIO (counts)

LES

Less Than (A<B)

Source A

Source B

F12:0

0.0

-32768.0

-32768.0

0.0

Expression (F12:1 I F12:4) * 32768.0

Dest

ADD

Less Than (A<B)

Source A

Source B

F12:0

0.0

-65536.0

-65536.0

N10:10

0

Move

MOV

Source A

Dest

-1

-1

N10:10

0

EQU

Equal

Source A

Source B

F12:0

0.0

-32768.0

-32768.0

Dest

MOV

Move

Source A

F12:0

0.0

N10:10

0

Move

MOV

Source A

Dest

-1

-1

N10:11

0

LIM

Limit Test

Low Lim

-32767.0

-32767.0

Test

F12:0

0.0

-1.0

High Lim

-1.0

Move

Source

MOV

Dest

F12:0

0.0

N10:10

0

Move

MOV

Source A

Dest

-1

-1

N10:11

0

GRT

Greater Than (A>B)

Source A

Source B

F12:0

0.0

32767.0

32767.0

SUB

Subtract

Source A

Source B

Dest

F12:0

0.0

65536.0

65536.0

N10:10

0

Move

MOV

Source A

Dest

-1

-1

N10:11

0

The feedback is also scaled so that base motor speed = 32768. The SLC/PLC-5 does not use DINT, and only handle 16 bit integers, so the feedback has to be handled differently to account for references above 32767 or below -32768. The following example shows how to read feedback values less than twice base motor speed, but does not show the logic for the block transfer I/O messages. See Chapter

4 of the 20-COMM-R User Manual for an example program for the block transfer

I/O messages.

2-98


0002

Convert the speed feedback that comes over RIO as 2, 16 bit intergers into a 32 bit floating feedback.

N11:10 = LSW of speed feedback from RIO (counts)

N11:111 = MSW of speed feedback from RIO (counts)

F12:2 = 32 bit floating point speed feedback (counts)

GRT

Greater Than (A>B)

Source A

Source B

N11:110

0

0

0

EQU

Equal

Source A

Source B

N11:111

0

-1

-1

SUB

Subtract

Source A

Source B

Dest

N11:110

0

65536.0

65536.0

F12:2

0.0

EQU

Equal

Source A

Source B

N11:110

0

-32768.0

-32768.0

EQU

Equal

Source A N11:111

0

Source B

-1

-1

Move

Source

Dest

MOV

-32768.0

-32768.0

F12:2

0.0

LIM

Limit Test

Low Lim

Test

High Lim

-32767.0

-32767.0

N11:110

0

-1.0

-1.0

LIM

Limit Test

Low Lim

Test

High Lim

0.0

0.0

N11:110

0

32767.0

32767.0

LES

Greater Than (A<B)

Source A

Source B

N11:110

0

0

0

0003

Convert the speed feedback into an RPM value.

F12:3 = speed feedback (RPM)

F12:2 = 32 bit floating point speed feedback (counts)

F12:4 = base motor speed (RPM)

EQU

Equal

Source A

Source B

EQU

Equal

Source A

Source B

EQU

Equal

Source A

Source B

N11:111

0

-1

-1

N11:111

0

0

0

N11:111

0

0

0

CPT

Compute

Move

Source

Dest

Move

Source

Dest

Dest

MOV

MOV

ADD

Add

Source A

Source B

N11:110

0

F12:2

0.0

N11:110

0

F12:2

0.0

N11:110

0

65536.0

65536.0

F12:2

0.0

Dest F12:3

0.0

Expression (F12:2 I 32768.0) * F12:4


Datalinks are transmitted and received through block transfers. The SLC/PLC-5 is limited to 16 bit integers and floating point. Because the SLC/PLC-5 does not support 32-bit integers, 32-bit integer Datalinks remain split into (2) 16 bit integers.

In order to send or receive floating-point Datalinks we have to swap the LSW and

MSW and utilize the COP (copy) instruction. The following examples are for transmitting and receiving the floating-point Datalinks, but do not show the logic for the block transfer I/O messages. See Chapter 4 of the 20-COMM-R User

Manual for an example program for the block transfer I/O messages.


2-99

Figure 2.19 Reading DINT datalinks in an SLC/PLC-5

0004

A DINT datalink is sent across RIO as 2, 16 bit intergers. There is no DINT datatype in the SLC, so to read the data we will copy the

DINT into 2, 16 bit intergers.

N11:114 = LSW Datalink A2 Out from RIO BT Read

N11:115 = MSW Datalink A2 Out from RIO BT Read

N13:114 = LSW Datalink A2 Out

N13:115 = MSW Datalink A2 Out

Copy File

Source #N11:114

Dest #N13:114

Length 2

0005

Figure 2.20 Writing DINT Datalinks in an SLC/PLC-5

A DINT datalink is sent across RIO as 2, 16 bit intergers. There is no DINT datatype in the SLC, so to write the data we use 2, 16 bit intergers in the SLC.

N13:14 = LSW Datalink A2 In

N13:15 = MSW Datalink A2 In

N10:14 = LSW Datalink A2 in for RIO BT Write

N10:15 = MSW Datalink A2 in for RIO BT Write

Copy File

Source #N13:14

Dest #N10:14

Length

2

Figure 2.21 Reading Floating-Point Datalinks in an SLC/PLC-5

0006

A floating point datalink is sent across RIO as 2, 16 bit intergers. To read a floating point datalink correctly in the SLC, you must first swap the high and low 16 bit intergers, and then copy the 2, intergers into a floating point address.

N11:112 = LSW Datalink A1 Out from RIO BT Read

N11:111 = MSW Datalink A1 Out from RIO BT Read

N13:112 = MSW Datalink A1 Out

N13:113 = LSW Datalink A1 Out

N12:5 = Datalink A1 Out

Move

Source

MOV

Dest

N11:112

21158

F13:113

23873

Move

Source

MOV

Dest

N11:113

17447

F13:112

17447

COP

Copy File

Source #N13:112

Dest

#N12:5

Length 1

2-100


Figure 2.22 Writing Floating-Point Datalinks in an SLC/PLC-5

0007

A floating point datalink is sent across RIO as 2, 16 bit intergers. To write a floating point datalink correctly in the SLC, you must first copy the floating point into 2 intergers, then swap the high and low 16 bit intergers.

F12:6 = Datalink A1 In

N13:12 = MSW Datalink A1 In

N13:13 = LSW Datalink A1 In

N10:12 = LSW Datalink A1 In from RIO BT Write

N10:13 = MSW Datalink A1 In from RIO BT Write

COP

Copy File

Source #F12:6

Dest #F13:12

Length

2

Move

Source

MOV

Dest

N13:12

16800

N10:13

16800

Move

Source

MOV

N13:13

0

Dest

F10:12

0

Explicit Block Transfer Messaging

Explicit block transfer messaging is used to configure the drive and monitor data from the drive. This type of block transfer is different than the block transfer used to transmit and receive datalinks. Chapter 5 of the 20-COMM-R User Manual shows the format of the block transfer request and response data in an SLC and

PLC-5.

Because the SLC/PLC-5 does not support 32-bit integers, 32-bit integer data from the block transfer request and response data remains split into (2) 16 bit integers. In order to send or receive floating-point data we have to swap the LSW and MSW and utilize the COP (copy) instruction. The following examples are for transmitting and receiving floating-point data for block transfer messages, but do not show the logic for the block transfer explicit messages themselves. See Chapter 5 of the

20-COMM-R User Manual for an example program for the block transfer explicit messages.

Figure 2.23 Reading Floating-Point Block Transfer Data in an SLC/PLC-5

Detailed Drive Operation 2-101

Figure 2.24 Writing Floating-Point Block Transfer Data in an SLC/PLC-5

RFI Filter Grounding



See

Speed Reference on page 2-113 .

S-Curve

Speed Control, Speed Mode,

Speed Regulation

See

Speed/Position Feedback section for information about feedback devices and

speed regulation with and without a speed feedback device.

See the

Speed PI Regulator

section for information about the speed regulator.

See the

Torque Reference section for information about choosing the output of the

speed regulator as the reference to the torque loop.

2-102


Speed/Position Feedback

The speed feedback block selects the feedback device and scales the feedback signal. This section will describe in detail how each of these functions operates.

Feedback Device

Parameter 222 [Motor Fdbk Sel] selects the feedback device for motor speed and position feedback. The possible settings for [Motor Fdbk Sel] are:

• 0 - "Encoder 0"

• 1 - "Encoder 1"

• 2 - "Sensorless"

• 3 - "Reserved" (this setting is not used)

• 4 - "Motor Sim"

• 5 - "FB Opt Port0"

• 6 - “FB Opt Port1”

Parameter 223 [Mtr Fdbk Alt Sel] selects an alternate feedback device when a feedback loss is detected on the primary device. The possible settings for [Mtr Fdbk

Alt Sel] are the same as the possible settings for [Motor Fdbk Sel].

Speed regulation with a Feedback Sensor: 0.001% of Top Speed over a 100:1 Speed

Range

Speed regulation sensorless: 0.5% of Top Speed Over a 120:1 typical Speed Range

Encoder

There are (2) encoder inputs on the standard I/O board of the PowerFlex® 700S.

They are located at TB2 - Row T (Top) and TB2 - Row B (Bottom). The encoder inputs are rated for Incremental, Dual Channel Quadrature type, Isolated with differential transmitter Output (Line Drive). The encoder inputs can accept 5V DC or 12V DC. There is a 12V DC supply on the drive that can be used to supply power for the encoders. An external 5VDC power supply is required when the encoder requires a 5V DC supply.

An encoder offers the best performance for both speed and torque regulation applications. Encoder feedback is required for applications with high bandwidth response, tight speed regulation, torque regulation of (+/- 2%) or when the motor is required to operate at less than 1/100th its' base speed.

[Encoderx PPR] sets the pulse per revolution rating of the encoder. This parameter has a range from 10 to 20000 PPR.


[Encdrx Config] sets the configuration option for the encoder. The bits for [Encder x Config] are broken down as follows:

• Bit 0 - "Enc Filt bt0"




• Bit 4 - "Endr 4x"

• Bit 5 - "Encdr A Phs"

• Bit 6 - "Encdr Dir"

• Bit 7 - "Reserved" (not used)


• Bit 9 - "Edge Time"



• Bit 12 - "SmplRate bt0"




• Bits 16 to 31 - "Reserved" (not used)

The function of the bits in [Encdrx Config] is explained here.

• Bits 0 "Enc Filt bt0", 1 "Enc Filt bt1", 2 "Enc Filt bt2", and 3 "Enc Filt bt3"

configure encoder input filter (see Table 2.F Encoder Input Filter Settings

). The filter requires the input signal to be stable for the specified time period. Input transitions within the filter time setting will be ignored.

• Bits 4 "Encdr 4x" and 5 "Encdr A Phs" determine how the encoder channel A and B signals will be interpreted. Typically, both encoder phases A and B are used so that direction information is available. The parameter 230 [Encdr0

Position] counts up for forward rotation and down for reverse rotation. If bit 5 is set, then the B phase signal is ignored. As a result, the encoder position will only increase, regardless of rotation direction. Bits 4 and 5 together also determine

the number of edges counted per encoder pulse (see Table 2.G Multiplier and

Direction Settings ). "4x" sampling counts both rise and fall of both A and B

encoder phases, hence 4 edges per pulse. In 4x mode, the encoder position will change by four times the encoder pulses per revolution rating (PPR) per encoder revolution (e.g., it increments the value in parameter 230 [Encdr0 Position] by

4096 for one revolution of a 1024 PPR encoder).

• Bit 6 "Encdr Dir" inverts the channel A input, thus reversing the direction of the feedback.

• Bit 9 "Edge Time" configures the method of sampling used by the Velocity

Position Loop (VPL). Setting the bit chooses "Edge to Edge" sampling, while resetting the bit to zero chooses "Simple Difference" sampling. "Simple

Difference" sampling calculates speed by examining the difference between pulse counts over a fixed sample time. "Edge to Edge" sampling adjusts the sample time to synchronize with the position count updates from the daughter card - improving the accuracy of the speed calculation.

• Bits 12 "SmplRate bt0" through 15 "SmplRate bt3" configure the sample interval for measuring speed (see

Table 2.F Encoder Input Filter Settings ).

Increasing the encoder sample interval improves speed measurement near zero speed. Decreasing allows the speed control regulator to perform with high gains at high speeds.

2-104


Table 2.F Encoder Input Filter Settings

Bit 3 2 1 0 Encoder Bit Filter Settings

0 0 0 0 Filter disabled

0 0 0 1 100 ns filter

0 0 1 0 200 ns filter

0 0 1 1 300 ns filter

0 1 0 0 400 ns filter

0 1 0 1 500 ns filter

0 1 1 0 600 ns filter

0 1 1 1 700 ns filter

1 0 0 0 800 ns filter (default setting)

1 0 0 1 900 ns filter

1 0 1 0 1000 ns filter

1 0 1 1 1100 ns filter

1 1 0 0 1200 ns filter

1 1 0 1 1300 ns filter

1 1 1 0 1400 ns filter

1 1 1 1 1500 ns filter

Table 2.G Multiplier and Direction Settings

Bit 5 4 Mult. Directions Comments

0 0 2x fwd/rev Counts rise/fall of phase A, phase B only used to find direction

0 1 4x

1 0 1x fwd/rev Counts rise/fall of both A and B phases (default setting) fwd only Counts rise of phase A. Phase B ignored.

1 1 2X fwd only Counts rise of phase A. Phase B ignored.

Table 2.H Encoder Sample Interval Settings

Bit 15 14 13 12 Encoder Sample Interval Settings

0 0 0 0 0.5 ms

0 0 0 1 0.5 ms (min. setting)

0 0 1 0 1.0 ms

0 0 1 1 1.5 ms

0 1 0 0 2.0 ms (default setting)

0 1 0 1 2.5 ms

0 1 1 0 3.0 ms

0 1 1 1 3.5 ms

1 0 0 0 4.0 ms

1 0 0 1 4.5 ms

1 0 1 0 5.0 ms

1 0 1 1 5.5 ms

1 1 0 0 6.0 ms (max. setting)

1 1 0 1 6.0 ms

1 1 1 0 6.0 ms

1 1 1 1 6.0 ms


[Encdrx Error] indicates the error status of the encoder when there is an error. The bits for [Encdrx Error] are broken down as follows:

• Bit 0 - "EncdrMissing"

• Bit 1 - "Quad Loss"

• Bit 2 - "Phase Loss"

• Bit 3 - "Phase Level"

The encoder block generates speed feedback, seen in [Encdrx Spd Fdbk]. [Encdrx

Spd Fdbk] is in units of RPM.

The encoder block also generates a position feedback, seen in [Encdrx Position].

[Encdrx Position] is in counts.

Encoder0 PPR

Encdr0 Config

232

233

Encdr0 Spd Fdbk

231

Encoder 0

Processing

Encdr0 Error

234

230

Encdr0 Position

Sensorless

Sensorless mode is used when zero speed or more than a 120:1 speed range is not required.

Parameter 548 [Est Speed Fdbk] contains the estimated motor speed, used when sensorless mode is selected. The estimated speed feedback is based on voltage feedback from the motor. [Est Speed Fdbk] is scaled so that a value of 4096 equals parameter 4 [Motor NP RPM].

The estimated speed feedback is converted to RPM, which can be seen in parameter

74 [Motor Spd Est].

Parameter 75 [MtrSpd Est Posit] is an estimated position for sensorless mode. It is calculated based on [Est Speed Fdbk] and the value in parameter 226 [Virtual Edge/

Rev]. [Virtual Edge/Rev] is a user defined value for the number of pulses per motor revolution.

Est Speed Fdbk

548

4096

/

Σ

Accum

Motor Spd Est

74

75

MtrSpd Est Posit

Virtual Edge/Rev

226

Motor Simulator

The simulator mode allows the drive to be operated without a motor connected and is meant for demo purposes only. If a motor is connected with this mode selected very erratic and unpredictable operation will occur.

2-106


Parameter 76 [MtrSpd Simulated] contains the simulated speed feedback and is scaled in units of RPM.

Parameter 70 [MtrSpd Sim Posit] contains the simulated position feedback. It is calculated based on the simulated speed feedback and the value in [Virtual Edge/

Rev]. [Virtual Edge/Rev] is a user defined value for the number of pulses per motor revolution.

Motor

Simulator

Spd Calc

Σ

Accum

MtrSpd Simulated

76

70

MtrSpd Sim Posit

Virtual Edge/Rev

226

Feedback Option Cards

There are (3) different feedback option cards that can be installed on the

PowerFlex® 700S:

1. The Hi-Resolution Encoder Feedback Option Card

2. The Resolver Feedback Option Card

3. The MDI (Multi Device Interface) Option Card

Only one of the option cards above can be physically installed on the drive at a time. When the Hi-Resolution Encoder Option or Resolver Option are installed, their data is processed by feedback option card port 0. When the MDI Option is installed, it has a Hi-Resolution Encoder processed by feedback option card port 0 and a Temposonics linear sensor processed by feedback option card port 1.

Parameter 251 [FB Opt0 Spd Fdbk] contains the speed feedback from either the

Hi-Resolution Encoder or the Resolver connected at port 0.

Parameter 250 [FB Opt0 Posit] contains the position feedback from either the

Hi-Resolution Encoder or the Resolver connected at port 0.

Parameter 277 [FB Opt1 Spd Fdbk] contains the speed feedback from the

Temposonics linear sensor when the MDI option is installed.

Parameter 276 [FB Opt1 Posit] contains the position feedback from the

Temposonics linear sensor when the MDI option is installed.


Hi Res0 Config 259

Reslvr0 Config

266

Fdbk Option ID

249

Rslvr0 Spd Ratio

Reslvr0 Carrier

Reslvr0 In Volts

Rslvr0 XfrmRatio

Reslvr0 CableBal

270

271

272

273

274

Feedback

Option Card 0

Processing

FB Opt0 Spd Fdbk

251

250

FB Opt0 Posit

FB Opt1 Spd Fdbk

277

260

267

276

FB Opt1 Posit

Hi Res0 Status

Reslvr0 Status

Parameter 249 [Fdbk Option ID] displays information about the feedback option installed in feedback option card port 0. This information is read from the feedback option card. Bits 15-11 will be a value of 2000 hex for an old hi-resolution option card and a value of 2020 hex for a new hi-resolution option card.

Hi-Resolution Encoder Feedback Option

The position feedback (seen in [FB Opt0 Posit]) from a Hi-Resolution Encoder counts at a rate of 1,048,576 counts per motor revolution.

Parameter 259 [Hi Res0 Config] is used to configure the Hi-Resolution Encoder.

• Bit 5 "Hi Res Dir" determines counting direction. If clear, direction is forward or up. If set, the direction is reverse or down.

• Bits12 "SmplRate bt0" - 15 "SmplRate bt3" configure the sample interval for

measuring speed (see Table 2.I Encoder Sample Interval ). Increasing the

encoder sample interval improves speed measurement near zero speed.

Decreasing allows the speed control regulator to perform with high gains at high speeds.

• The remaining bits are reserved (not used).

Table 2.I Encoder Sample Interval

Bit 15 14 13 12 Encoder Sample Interval Settings

0 0 0 0 0.5 ms

0 0 0 1 0.5 ms (min. setting)

0 0 1 0 1.0 ms

0 0 1 1 1.5 ms

0 1 0 0 2.0 ms (default setting)

0 1 0 1 2.5 ms

0 1 1 0 3.0 ms

0 1 1 1 3.5 ms

1 0 0 0 4.0 ms

1 0 0 1 4.5 ms

1 0 1 0 5.0 ms

1 0 1 1 5.5 ms

1 1 0 0 6.0 ms (max. setting)

1 1 0 1 6.0 ms

1 1 1 0 6.0 ms

1 1 1 1 6.0 ms

2-108


Parameter 260 [Hi Res0 Status] indicates faults on the Hi-Resolution Encoder

Feedback Option.

• Bit 8 "Open Wire" indicates an open wire fault.

• Bit 9 "Power Fail" indicates the failure of the power supply.

• Bit 10 "Diag Fail" indicates the option board failed its power-up diagnostic test.

• Bit 11 "Msg Checksum" indicates a message checksum fault.

• Bit 12 "Time Out Err" indicates a RS-485 time-out fault.

• The remaining bits are reserved (not used).

Resolver Feedback Option

Parameter 266 [Reslvr0 Config] is used to configure the resolver feedback option.

• Setting bit 0 "Cable Tune" enables the cable tuning test, resetting the bit to zero disables the test. This test automatically runs on power up to measure the IR drop in the resolver cable.

• Bit 1 "Reserved" (not used)

• Bits 2 "Resolution 0" and bit 3 "Resolution 1" select the resolver resolution (see

Table 2.J Resolution Settings

).

• Setting bit 4 "Energize" energizes the resolver, resetting the bit to zero de-energizes it.

• Bit 5 "Resolver Dir" determines counting direction. If clear, direction is forward or up. If set, the direction is reverse or down.

• Bit 9 "Reserved" (not used)

• Bits 10 "Reserved" (not used)

• Bit 12 - 15 “SmplRate bt 0” - “SmplRate bt3” configure the sample interval for measuring speed (refer to

Table 2.K Resolver Sample Interval

). Increasing the resolver sample interval improves speed measurement near zero speed.

Decreasing the resolver sample interval allows the speed control regulator to perform with high gains at high speeds.

Table 2.J Resolution Settings

Bit 3 2

0 0 10 bit resolution

0 1 12 bit resolution (default setting)

1 0 14 bit resolution

1 1 16 but resolution

Table 2.K Resolver Sample Interval

Bit 15 14 13 12

0 0 0 0

0

0

0

0

0

1

1

0

0

0

0

0

0

1

1

1

1

0

0

1

1

0

1

0

1

1

0

1

1

1

1

0

0

0

0

1

1

0

0

1

1

0

1

0

1

0

‘

1

Resolver Sample Interval

Settings

0.5 ms

0.5 ms (min. setting)

1.0 ms

1.5 ms

2.0 ms (default setting)

2.5 ms

3.0 ms

3.5 ms

4.0 ms

4.5 ms

5.0 ms

5.5 ms

6.0 ms (max. setting)


Bit 15 14 13 12

1

1

1

1

1

1

0

1

1

1

0

1

Resolver Sample Interval

Settings

6.0 ms

6.0 ms

6.0 ms

Parameter 270 [Reslvr0 SpdRatio] specifies the speed ratio for the resolver option card at port 0. The speed ratio comes from the following formula.

Speed ratio = electrical revolutions / mechanical revolutions = pole count / 2.

Parameter 271 [Reslvr0 Carrier] specifies the resolver carrier frequency for the resolver option card at port 0.

Parameter 272 [Reslvr0 In Volts] specifies the resolver input voltage for the resolver option card at port 0.

Parameter 273 [Rslvr0 XfrmRatio] specifies the resolver transform ratio for the resolver option card at port 0.

Parameter 274 [Reslvr0 CableBal] specifies the resolver cable balance for the resolver option card at port 0.

Parameter 267 [Reslvr0 Status] indicates status of the resolver option card port 0.

• Bit 0 "Cable Status" indicates that the cable tuning test is in progress.

• Bit 1 "Tune Result" indicates the tuning parameter type. When set, it indicates the tuning is using the parameter database. When cleared, it indicates the tuning is using derived data.

• Bit 2 "Mtr Turning" indicates that the motor is turning.

• Bit 3 “Cable Comp” indicates ...

• Bit 4 "Energized" indicates the resolver is energized.

• Bit 8 "Open Wire" indicates a problem with the cable (open circuit).

• Bit 9 "Power Supply" indicates problem with the option card's power supply.

• Bit 10 "Diag Fail" indicates the option card has failed its power-up diagnostics.

• Bit 11 “Select OK” indicates ...

Motor Position Feedback

The motor position feedback is selected according to the feedback device selection.

The value for motor position feedback appears in parameter 762 [Mtr Posit Fdbk].

[Mtr Posit Fdbk] is in counts. From there, the position feedback enters the position control loop.

Motor Speed Feedback and Scaled Speed Feedback

The motor speed feedback is selected according to the feedback device selection.

The value for motor speed feedback appears in parameter 300 [Motor Spd Fdbk].

[Motor Spd Fdbk] is in RPM. From there, the speed feedback enters the speed regulation loop. The filter for the speed feedback is shown in the speed regulation loop section.

Branching off of the motor speed feedback, there is a low pass filter. This low pass filter filters out high frequency before displaying the speed feedback on the HIM.

Parameter 72 [Scaled Spd Fdbk] provides a user scalable speed feedback. It is multiplied by the value in parameter 73 [Spd Fdbk Scale].

2-110


Filter

LPass

73

Spd Fdbk Scale

Motor Spd Fdbk

300 to Speed

Control [3A4]

To HIM Display

X

Scaled Spd Fdbk

72

Speed Feedback Loss Ride Through

The speed feedback loss ride through function provides an automatic switch over from the primary motor speed feedback device to the alternate motor speed feedback device when a primary motor speed feedback device fault is sensed. If the alternate speed feedback device has failed the switching will not be allowed and the drive will fault. The active device can be monitored and manual switching between the primary and alternate devices is available. This function has also been referred to as tach loss switch over and encoder loss ride through.

The drive determines that the encoder has faulted based on a combination of hardware detection and monitoring the rate of change of the motor speed. The hardware fault detection is based on illegal encoder states and improper encoder switching patterns. The rate of change of motor speed detection is determined by a rate of change greater than a user-defined speed change.

Hardware detection of feedback loss for the feedback option cards is based on the type of device used and specific fault detection implemented on the feedback option card. The rate of change of motor speed detection is the same implementation as for encoder feedback.

Speed feedback loss ride through is not allowed in position mode. If the encoder loss ride through function was allowed in a positioning system it is likely that the alternate feedback device will supply an arbitrary position feedback value when an encoder loss is detected. This, in turn, could result in unintended motion in the drive system.

!

ATTENTION: Even though the encoder loss ride through function attempts to automatically switch feedback devices with minimum disturbance, a system disturbance will occur. In some cases feedback device degradation may occur before complete failure takes place. The user must determine if the encoder loss ride through function is appropriate for each application.

Speed Feedback Loss Ride Through Configuration

Parameter 151 [Logic Command] bit 2, "TackLoss Rst" provides a manual switch between primary and alternate speed feedback devices with a “0” to “1” bit transition. A transition from “1” to “0” does not cause a change in operation.


Parameter 152 [Applied LogicCmd] bit 2, "TachLoss Rst" shows the status of parameter 151 [Logic Command] bit 2 "TachLoss Rst" switch.

Setting parameter 153 [Control Options], bit 16 "Auto Tach Sw" to a value of “1” enables the automatic switching of speed feedback devices when a failure is detected. A value of “0” disables the automatic switching of speed feedback devices. Only automatic switching from the primary device specified in parameter

222 [Mtr Fdbk Sel Pri] to the alternate device specific in parameter 223 [Mtr Fdbk

Sel Alt] is available. Switching from the alternate to the primary device must be done manually by setting parameter 151 [Logic Command], bit 2 "TackLoss Rst" from “0” to “1”.

Parameter 155 [Logic Status] bit 12, "Tach Loss Sw," shows which speed feedback device is currently active. A value of “0” in bit 12 indicates that the primary speed feedback device selected in [Mtr Fdbk Sel Pri] is active. A value of “1” in bit 12 indicates that the alternate speed feedback device selected in [Mtr Fdbk Sel Alt] is active.

Parameter 222 [Mtr Fdbk Sel Pri] selects the primary speed feedback device. It is not intended to use the sensorless selection as the primary (or active) speed feedback device as there is no feedback loss detection used with sensorless operation.

Parameter 223 [Mtr Fdbk Sel Alt] selects the alternate speed feedback device. Any selection of feedback devices, including sensorless operation is available providing a corresponding motor type and associated feedback device is present.

Settings for parameter 222 [Mtr Fdbk Sel Pri] and parameter 223 [Mtr Fdbk Sel

Alt]:

0 = Encoder 0

1 = Encoder 1

2 = Sensorless

3 = Reserved

4 = Motor Sim

5 = FB Opt Port0

Parameter 224 [TachSwitch Level] sets the detection level for the automatic speed loss switch over routine. A drop in feedback speed at the percent of rated speed over a 0.5 mSec interval will cause a tach switch from primary to alternate device.

Setting this level lower will make the speed detection more sensitive and lower the minimum speed at which a speed switch could occur. Setting this level higher will make the speed switch less sensitive and raise the minimum speed for speed switch detection.

Parameter 320 [Exception Event1] bits 2 through 5 show the error status of the corresponding speed feedback device.

2 = Encdr0 Loss

3 = Encdr1 Loss

4 = FB Opt0 Loss

5 = FB Opt1 Loss

Parameter 365 [Fdbk LsCnfg Pri] and parameter 366 [Fdbk LsCnfg Alt] set the feedback loss configuration for each feedback device. The primary feedback device should be configured to 1 "Alarm". The alternate feedback device should typically be configured to 2 "FltCoastStop".

Settings for [Fdbk LsCnfg Pri] and [Fdbk LsCnfg Alt]:

1 = Alarm

2 = FltCoastStop

2-112


Parameter 510 [FVC Mode Config] bit 22 “SrLss RdThru” must be set to “1” if sensorless operation is selected in [Mtr Fdbk Sel Alt]. In all other cases Parameter

510 bit 22 should be set to “0”.

Speed Feedback Loss Ride Through Operation

Setting up the feedback loss ride through function requires the following steps:

1. Enter a valid feedback device selection in parameter 222 [Mtr Fdbk Sel Pri]

2. Enter a valid feedback device selection in parameter 223 [Mtr Fdbk Sel Alt]

3. Setting parameter 365 [Fdbk LsCnfg Pri] to 1 "Alarm"

4. Setting parameter 366 [Fdbk LsCnfg Alt] to 2 "FltCoastStop" (recommended but not necessary)

5. Setting the speed change detection level in parameter 224 [TachSwitch Level]

6. Setting parameter 153 [Control Options] bit 16 "Auto Tach Sw" to 1 for automatic switch over

7. Setting parameter 510 [FVC Mode Config] bit 22 "SrLssRdThru" to 1 when sensorless operation is selected in parameter 223

Logic Command

(TachLoss Rst)

151 2

Control Options

(AutoTach Sw)

153 16

FdbkLoss

Detect

Speed Feedback from Primary Device

Speed Feedback from Alternate Device

0

1

155 12

Logic Status

(TachLoss Sw)

Motor Spd Fdbk

300 to Speed

Regulator

Automatic and manual switching of feedback devices is inhibited if a loss in parameter 320 [Exception Event1] bits 2-4 (as appropriate) is sensed on the device to which switching was to take place. The drive will fault when it is configured for speed feedback loss ride through and the primary device fails when the alternate device has failed and is also configured to fault. If the alternate device is not configured to fault, then switching to the alternate device will be inhibited and operation on the primary feedback device will continue. Note that operation on the primary device will continue even with that device's failure since that fault must be configured for an alarm to allow for automatic device switch over.

Manual Speed Feedback Device Switching

Parameter 151 [Logic Command] bit 2, "TackLoss Rst," provides a manual switch between active and non-active primary or alternate speed feedback devices with a

“0” to “1” bit transition. Resetting bit 2 from a “1” to a “0” causes no change in operation. The switch is between the active feedback device (either primary or alternate) to the non-active device. For example, if prior to the reset the alternate

Detailed Drive Operation 2-113 device selected in Parameter 223 [Mtr Fdbk Sel Alt] is active, then after the reset the primary feedback device selected in Parameter 222 [Mtr Fdbk Sel Pri] will be used as the active speed feedback device. The reset activation is prohibited if a failure is sensed in the speed feedback device to which the drive is switching. The active device selection command is shown in parameter 152. Manual switching between primary and alternate devices can be made while the drive is running.

Speed Reference

The speed reference control loop consists of speed reference scaling, speed reference selection, jogging, speed reference limiting, ramping, s-curve, and filtering. Each of these features is described in greater detail below.

Figure 2.25 Overall Speed Reference Loop

Speed Ref 1

Spd Ref1 Divide

Speed Ref 2

Spd Ref2 Multi

Speed Ref 4

10

11

12

13

14

/

X

Speed Ref Sel

+

0

0

1

2

3

4

16

0

Jog Speed 1

17

1

Applied LogicCmd

152 18 152 23

0

1

18

Jog Speed 2

(Unipol Fwd) +1

1

Logic Ctrl State

157 00

1

Control Options

0

0

Applied LogicCmd

0

152 20 152 21

Max

X

153 00

1

0

Selected Spd Ref

40

Rev Speed Limit

Fwd Speed Limit

30

31

Limit

Limited Spd Ref

41

Speed Ref 5

Speed Ref DPI

*

*

15

20 set the desired port in param 691

5

6

(Unipol Rev) -1

Ramp

Logic Command

(SpdRamp Dsbl)

151 00

Accel Time

Decel Time

Inv

Logic Command

(Spd S Crv En)

151 01

32

33

1 0

0 1

Logic

1 0

0 1

Logic

157 01

Logic Ctrl State

(SRef Ramp En)

Ramped Spd Ref

42

S Curve

34

S Curve Time

&

157 02

Logic Ctrl State

(SRef SCrv En)

Virt Encoder PPR

1

FricComp Spd Ref

Link

Inertia SpeedRef

Link

Logic Command

(Inertia Comp)

56

151 10

Total Inertia

InertiaAccelGain

InertiaDecelGain

DeltaSpeedScale

9

57

58

60

43

S Curve Spd Ref

Link

Spd Ref Bypass

37

Control Options

(SRef Filt En)

153

SpdRef Filt Gain

SpdRef Filt BW

01

35

36

∆n

∆t

140

Inertia Comp

(kn * s)+ wn s + wn

Lead Lag

61

One

Scan

Delay

4x internal

Virtual Encoder

45

Delayed Spd Ref

62

One

Scan

Delay

Virt Encdr Posit

Logic Command

(Frict Comp)

151

FricComp Setup

11

FricComp Stick

FricComp Slip

FricComp Rated

141

142

143

144

63 Virt Encdr Dlyed

Friction Comp

Speed Comp

55

Filtered Spd Ref

44

X

Scaled Spd Ref

46

38

Speed Ref Scale

PI Output 180 from Process

Control [5G2]

Link 21

Speed Trim 1

+

FricComp TorqAdd

145 to Torque

Control [4B2]

Inertia Torq Add

59 to Torque

Control [4B1]

Spd Trim1 SpdRef

47 to Speed Control

- Regulator [3A2]

Speed Reference Scaling

The first section of the reference selection block is speed reference scaling. Both speed reference 1 and 2 have parameters associated with them to scale the values.

Refer to

Figure 2.25

.

Speed Ref 1

Spd Ref1 Divide

Speed Ref 2

Spd Ref2 Multi

10

11

12

13

/

X

2-114


Parameter 10 [Speed Ref 1] and parameter 12 [Speed Ref 2] are real parameters with units of per unit, where a value of 1 per unit equals base motor speed. Both

[Speed Ref 1] and [Speed Ref 2] have their own scaling blocks.

The speed reference value in [Speed Ref 1] is divided by the scaling parameter 11

[Speed Ref1 Divide]. [Speed Ref1 Divide] cannot be changed while running, and cannot be linked to by another parameter.

The speed reference value for [Speed Ref 2] is multiplied by the scaling parameter

13 [Speed Ref2 Multi]. [Speed Ref2 Multi] is a linkable parameter. This allows speed reference 2 to be scaled "dynamically" with an input signal if desired. An example would be to have an analog input linked to the scale parameter. The speed reference and the scale would then affect the value sent to the reference select block.

Parameters 14 [Speed Ref 4], 15 [Speed Ref 5], and 20 [Speed Ref DPI] are in display units of RPM and do not have their own scaling blocks.

Speed Reference Select

Parameter 16 [Speed Ref Sel] selects which one of the seven input signals is acknowledged as the reference. [Speed Ref Sel] could be changed through a controller or through a digital input (see Digital Inputs for an example).

Speed Ref 1

Spd Ref1 Divide

Speed Ref 2

Spd Ref2 Multi

10

11

12

13

Speed Ref 4

14

Speed Ref 5

Speed Ref DPI

*

15

20

/

X

Speed Ref Sel

0

0

16

1

2

+

5

6

3

4

[Speed Ref Sel] can be set to the following values:

Setting Description

0 - Zero Speed Zero Speed is selected as the speed reference.

1 - Spd Ref 1 [Speed Ref 1] is selected as the speed reference.


3 - Spd Ref 3 The sum of [Speed Ref 1] and [Speed Ref 2] is selected as the speed reference. Note that there is no "Speed Ref 3" parameter.



6 - Spd Ref DPI [Speed Ref DPI] is selected as the speed reference.

The source of parameter 20 [Speed Ref DPI] is selected by parameter 691 [DPI Ref

Select]. [DPI Ref Select] can be set to one of the following: 1 - “Local HIM”, 2 -

“Ext DPI Conn”, 3 - Aux DPI Conn”, or 5- Int DPI Conn.” 4 - “Reserved” is not used.


Jog Reference

Two separate jog speeds can be used as a speed reference - parameter 17 [Jog Speed

1] or 18 [Jog Speed 2]. For more information on jog speeds see Jog

.

Stop Command

When a stop command is issued, parameter 157 [Logic Ctrl State] bit 0 - “Spd Ref

En” is set to 0, causing a zero speed to be selected. When [Logic Ctrl State] bit 0 is set to 1, the selected speed or jog reference is used.

Logic Ctrl State

157 00

1

0

0

Direction Control and Bipolar Reference

The direction of rotation of the motor can be controlled by a forward/reverse command or by the use of a bipolar signal. For more information on direction control, see

Direction Control and Bipolar Reference .

Speed Limits

The next section sets the forward and reverse speed limits for the speed reference.

Parameter 31 [Fwd Speed Limit] sets the positive speed limit, in RPM. Parameter

30 [Rev Speed Limit] sets the negative speed limit, in RPM. Parameter 41 [Limited

Spd Ref] contains value, in RPM, of the limited speed reference.

Limited Spd Ref

41

Limit

Rev Speed Limit

Fwd Speed Limit

30

31

Accel/Decel Ramp and S-Curve

The accel/decel ramp generator can be bypassed for certain functions. When parameter 151 [Logic Command] bit 0 - "SpdRamp Dsbl" is on, the ramp is bypassed. Otherwise, the reference is ramped according to the rates determined by parameters 32 [Accel Time] and 33 [Decel Time]. For example, the ramp rate for acceleration would be [Motor NP RPM]/[Accel Time]. The ramped reference can be viewed in parameter 42 [Ramped Spd Ref].

2-116


151 00

Accel Time

Decel Time

Inv

Logic Command

(Spd S Crv En)

151 01

Ramp

32

33

1 0

0 1

Logic

157 01

Logic Ctrl State

(SRef Ramp En)

1 0

0 1

Logic

Ramped Spd Ref

42

S Curve

34

S Curve Time

&

157 02

Logic Ctrl State

(SRef SCrv En)

S Curve Spd Ref

43

The drive can produce a linear ramp output or an s curve signal. The s curve is used when [Logic Command] bit 1 - "Spd S Curve En" is on and the ramp is not bypassed. Parameter 34 [S Curve Time] sets the time that the s curve will be applied at the beginning and at the end of the ramp. Half of the time specified in parameter

34 is added to the beginning of the ramp and half to the end of the ramp (as shown in the example below). The result of the s curve block can be seen in parameter 43

[S Curve Spd Ref].

Speed

0.5 sec.

Time in Seconds

0.5 sec.

Accel Time = 5.0 seconds

S Curve Time = 1.0 second

Total Ramp Time = 6.0 seconds

Speed Reference Bypass and Delayed Speed Reference

By default, parameter 37 [Spd Ref Bypass] is linked to [S Curve Spd Ref].

However, if you wish to bypass the rest of the speed reference control loop, [Spd

Ref Bypass] gives the capability to link to other parameters.


S Curve Spd Ref

43 Link

Spd Ref Bypass

37

One

Scan

Delay

Delayed Spd Ref

45

Parameter 45 [Delayed Spd Ref] is delayed by one scan of the speed control loop.

[Spd Ref Bypass] can be linked to [Delayed Spd Ref] instead of [S Curve Spd Ref] for use in SynchLink applications. See

SynchLink for more details.

Inertia Compensation

Inertia compensation is used to calculate the level of torque required due to load inertia during speed changes. For more information on inertia compensation, see

Inertia Compensation

.

Friction Compensation

The friction compensation block is used to calculate breakaway torque and the torque needed just to keep the motor running at a constant speed due to friction. For more information on friction compensation, see

Friction Compensation .

Virtual Encoder

The virtual encoder block generates a position counter based on the speed reference in [S Curve Spd Ref]. Parameter 61 [Virt Encoder PPR] is used to specify the desired pulses per revolution for the virtual encoder. The virtual encoder block will count at a rate of 4 times [Virt Encoder PPR] per one revolution of the motor. For example, if [Virt Encoder PPR] is 1024, the virtual encoder block will count at a rate of 4096 units per one revolution of the motor.

Parameter 62 [Virt Encdr Posit] is a 32 bit integer that contains the pulse count output of the virtual encoder block. This parameter is used for position follower applications (see the Follower section of the Position Loop).

Parameter 63 [Virt Encdr Dlyed] is a 32 bit integer that contains the pulse count output of the virtual encoder block delayed by one scan of the speed reference loop.

This parameter can be used to send a virtual position reference over SynchLink for position follower applications.

S Curve Spd Ref

43

Virt Encoder PPR 61

4x internal

Virtual Encoder

62

One

Scan

Delay

Virt Encdr Posit

63

Virt Encdr Dlyed

2-118


Speed Reference Filter

A lead lag filter can be turned on by setting parameter 153 [Control Options] bit 1 -

"Sref Filt En" on. Parameter 35 [SpdRef Filt Gain] sets the gain for the filter and parameter 36 [SpdRef Filt BW] sets the bandwidth for the filter.

Control Options

(SRef Filt En)

153

SpdRef Filt Gain

01

35

SpdRef Filt BW

36

(kn * s)+ wn s + wn

Lead Lag

Filtered Spd Ref

44

Speed Reference Scale

The speed reference value up to this point is multiplied by the scaling parameter 38

[Speed Ref Scale]. [Speed Ref Scale] is applied to all of the selected speed references, as opposed to the specific scaling parameters for speed reference 1 and

2. [Speed Ref Scale] is a linkable parameter. This allows the speed reference value to be scaled "dynamically" with an input signal if desired. An example would be to have an analog input linked to the scale parameter. The speed reference and the scale would then affect the value sent to the speed regulator.

X

Scaled Spd Ref

46

38

Speed Ref Scale

Speed Trim 1

At this point in the speed reference control loop, parameter 21 [Speed Trim 1] is added to the speed reference. By default, [Speed Trim 1] is linked to the output of the Process PI loop. The resulting parameter 47 [Spd Trim1 SpdRef] is sent into the speed regulator loop.

+

Spd Trim1 SpdRef

47 to Speed Control

- Regulator

PI Output

180 from Process

Control

Link 21

Speed Trim 1


Speed PI Regulator

The drive takes the speed reference specified by the speed reference control loop and compares it to the speed feedback. The speed regulator uses proportional and integral gains to adjust the torque reference sent to the motor. This torque reference attempts to operate the motor at the specified speed. This regulator also produces a high bandwidth response to speed command and load changes.

Figure 2.26 Overview of the Speed PI Regulator Loop

Speed Trim 3

SpdTrim 3 Scale

23

24

X from Speed Control

- Reference [2H4]

Spd Trim1 SpdRef

47

4x

Ovr Smpl

Posit Spd Output

318 from Position

Control [6H3] or [7H4]

Speed Trim 2

STrim2 Filt Gain

SpdTrim2 Filt BW

22

25

26

(kn * s)+ wn s + wn

Lead Lag

Logic Ctrl State

(Inrta Tst En)

157 04

+

0

Autotune

Bypass

1

19

Atune Spd Ref

Logic Ctrl State 157 5

8

(J Tst FulSpd)

(Spd Reg En)

30

31

Logic Ctrl State

(CurrLim Stop)

157 06

Limit

0

0

1 nff

Motor Spd Fdbk

300 from Feedback [9H2]

SReg FB Filt Gain

SReg FB Filt BW

93

94

SpdReg AntiBckup

(kn * s)+ wn s + wn

Lead Lag

84

Motor Speed Ref

301

+

-

Speed Error

100

71

Filtered SpdFdbk

Spd Err Filt BW

89

Filter

2 nd Order

LPass

FeedFwd ks s

ServoLck

Servo Lock Gain

85

Control Options

(Jog -NoInteg)

Speed Reg Ctrl

(Integ Hold)

Speed Reg Ctrl

(Integ Reset)

153

80

80

12

02

03

+

-

+ kp

P Gain

81

Spd Reg P Gain

+

ki s

I Gain

82

*

Spd Reg I Gain

Speed Reg Ctrl

(Preset Sel)

80 01

0

SReg Torq Preset

87

1

Motor Torque Ref

303

+

Spd Reg Pos Lim

Spd Reg Neg Lim

102

103

101

SpdReg Integ Out

Limit

Spd Reg Droop 86

Droop

Logic Ctrl State

(Spd Reg En)

157 08

(kn * s)+ wn s + wn

SRegOut FiltGain

95

Lead Lag

SReg Out Filt BW

96

0

0

1

Spd Reg PI Out

302 to Torque Control

[4A1]

The main purpose of the speed PI regulator is to produce a torque reference for the current regulator block. The following section will describe each portion of the speed PI regulator.

Speed Trim

The speed trim blocks are used to sum the speed reference from the speed reference control loop with speed trim values from other sources.

[Spd Trim1 SpdRef] contains the value of the speed reference from the speed reference control loop plus the value from [Speed Trim 1]. [Speed Trim 1] is setup by default to come from the process PI loop.

Parameter 22 [Speed Trim 2] provides a trim value with a lead/lag filter that is added to [Spd Trim1 SpdRef]. By default, it is linked to the output of the position loop. For more information on lead/lag filters refer to

Lead-Lag Filter on page 2-40 .

Parameter 23 [Speed Trim 3] provides a scalable speed trim value that is added to

[Spd Trim1 SpdRef]. The speed reference value for [Speed Trim 3] is multiplied by the scaling parameter 24 [Spd Trim 3 Scale]. [Spd Trim 3 Scale] is a linkable parameter. This allows speed trim 3 to be scaled "dynamically" with an input signal if desired. An example would be to have an analog input linked to the scale parameter. The speed trim and the scale would then affect the value sent to the summation block.

2-120


The speed trim values are summed with the speed reference from the speed reference control loop.

Speed Trim 3

SpdTrim 3 Scale

23

24

X from Speed Control

- Reference [2H4]

Spd Trim1 SpdRef

47

4x

Ovr Smpl

Posit Spd Output

318 from Position

Control [6H3] or [7H4]

Speed Trim 2

STrim2 Filt Gain

SpdTrim2 Filt BW

22

25

26

(kn * s)+ wn s + wn

Lead Lag

+

Autotune Speed Reference

During the inertia test, the autotune speed reference is used instead of the output of the speed trim summation. Parameter 19 [Atune Spd Ref] sets the speed for the inertia test.

Bits 4, 5, and 8 in parameter 157 [Logic Ctrl State] control when the [Atune Spd

Ref] is used.

• Bit 4 - "Inrta Tst En" turns on during the inertia test and allows the autotune speed reference to bypass the output of the speed trim summation.

• Bit 5 - "J Tst FulSpd" indicates that the inertia test reached the speed set in

[Atune Spd Ref].

• Bit 8 - "Spd Reg En" Indicates that the output of the speed regulator is enabled and the output is allowed to enter the torque loop.

Logic Ctrl State

(Inrta Tst En)

157 04

0

Autotune

Bypass

1

19

Atune Spd Ref

Logic Ctrl State

157 5

8

(J Tst FulSpd)

(Spd Reg En)

Speed Reference Limits

At this point the summed speed reference is limited by parameters 30 [Rev Speed

Limit] and 31 [Fwd Speed Limit]. Those limits are set at -2187.5 RPM and 2187.5

RPM default.


Rev Speed Limit

Fwd Speed Limit

30

31

Limit

Current Limit Stop

When a current limit stop is commanded, [Logic Ctrl State] bit 6 - "CurrLim Stop" is set. Then a 0 speed reference command is sent into the speed regulator, bypassing the ramp and speed trimming.

Logic Ctrl State

(CurrLim Stop)

157 06

0

0

1

Speed Error

The summed speed reference becomes parameter 301 [Motor Speed Ref]. Then the filtered motor speed feedback is subtracted from the motor speed reference to create a speed error.

There is a lead/lag filter that can be used to filter the motor speed feedback. The filter is setup by parameters 95 [Sreg FB Filt Gain] and 94 [Sreg FB Filt BW]. The filtered speed feedback is seen in parameter 71 [Filtered SpdFdbk].

The speed error is filtered by a low pass filter by adjusting [Spd Err Filt BW].

Motor Spd Fdbk

300

SReg FB Filt Gain

SReg FB Filt BW

93

94

Motor Speed Ref

301

(kn * s)+ wn s + wn

Lead Lag

+

-

Speed Error

100

71

Filtered SpdFdbk

Spd Err Filt BW

89

Filter

2 nd Order

LPass

Servo Lock

Servo lock is used for servo or positioning applications. The effect of Servo Lock is to increase stiffness of the speed response to a load disturbance. It behaves like a position regulator with velocity feed forward, but without the pulse accuracy of a true position regulator. The output of the servo lock block is summed with the filtered speed error.

2-122


Parameter 85 [Servo Lock Gain] sets the gain of an additional integrator in the speed regulator. The units of [Servo Lock Gain] are rad/sec. Gain should normally be set to less than 1/3 speed regulator bandwidth, or for the desired response. Set

[Servo Lock Gain] to zero to disable Servo Lock.

+

ks s

ServoLck

Servo Lock Gain

85

Speed Regulation Anti-Backup

Parameter 84 [SpdReg Anti Bckup] modifies the drive's response to the speed reference. With the value minimized, the drive will follow the reference very closely, minimizing error, which is desirable for typical process applications.

However, it will exhibit some over-shoot and under-shoot. Increasing the value of this term decreases the over-shoot and under-shoot, which is desirable where back-up cannot be tolerated. However, this tends to increase the following error:

This parameter has no affect on the drive's response to load changes. The recommended setting is 0.1 to 0.5.

from

Motor Speed Ref

nff

FeedFwd

SpdReg AntiBckup

84

The following is an example of how the anti-backup affects the speed regulator’s response.

Proportional Gain

The filtered speed error (after the servo lock is added and the anti-backup is subtracted) is sent to the proportional gain block. The proportional gain determines how much of a speed error occurs during a load transient.

Parameter 81 [Spd Reg P Gain] sets the proportional gain of the speed regulator. It's value is automatically calculated based on the bandwidth setting in parameter 90


[Spd Reg BW] and parameter 9 [Total Inertia]. Proportional gain may be manually adjusted by setting [Spd Reg BW] to a value of zero. Units are (per unit torque) /

(per unit speed). For example, when [Spd Reg P Gain] is 20, the proportional gain block will output 20% motor rated torque for every 1% error of motor rated speed.

Adjustments to parameters 474 [Freq Reg We BW] and 475 [Freq Reg Wr BW] may be necessary when using sensorless feedback.

kp

P Gain

81

Spd Reg P Gain

Integral Gain

The speed droop is subtracted from the filtered speed error (after the servo lock is added and the anti-backup is subtracted). This signal is then sent to the integral gain block. The integral gain block outputs a torque command relative to the error integrated over a period of time.

Parameter 82 [Spd Reg I Gain] sets the integral gain of the speed regulator. It's value is automatically calculated based on the bandwidth setting in [Spd Reg BW] and [Total Inertia]. Integral gain may be manually adjusted by setting [Spd Reg

BW] to a value of zero. Units are (per unit torque/sec) / (per unit speed). For example, when [Spd Reg I Gain] is 50 and the speed error is 1%, the integral output will integrate from 0 to 50% motor rated torque in 1 second.

Adjustments to parameters 474 [Freq Reg We BW] and 475 [Freq Reg Wr BW] may be necessary when using sensorless feedback.

When parameter 153 [Control Options] bit 12 - "Jog-NoInteg" is turned on, this tells the speed regulator not to use the integral gain during jog commands.

When Parameter 80 [Speed Reg Ctrl] bit 2 - "Integ Hold" is turned on, the

Integrator holds its output at the present level until the bit is turned off again.

When [Speed Reg Ctrl] bit 3 - "Integ Reset" is turned on, the output of the integrator is set to 0. When the "Integ Reset" bit is turned back off, the integrator output starts integrating up again from 0.

When [Speed Reg Ctrl] bit 1 - "Preset Sel" is turned on, the value in parameter 303

[Motor Torque Ref] is added to the integrator output. When "Preset Sel" is turned off, parameter 87 [Sreg Torq Preset] (default of 0 per unit) is added to the integrator output.

Parameter 101 [SpdReg Integ Out] contains the value of the torque output from the integrator. This parameter is in per unit so that a value of 1 equals rated motor torque.

2-124


\

Control Options

(Jog -NoInteg)

Speed Reg Ctrl

(Integ Hold)

Speed Reg Ctrl

(Integ Reset)

153 12

80 02

ki s

I Gain

82

Spd Reg I Gain

80 03

Speed Reg Ctrl

(Preset Sel)

SReg Torq Preset

87

80 01

0

Motor Torque Ref

303

1

101 SpdReg Integ Out

Droop

Droop is used to "shed" load and is usually used when a soft coupling of two motors is present in an application. For more information on droop, see the section titled "Droop".

Speed Regulator Output Limits

The outputs from the proportional block and integrator block are summed together, creating a torque reference. This torque reference is limited by parameter 102 [Spd

Reg Pos Lim] and 103 [Spd Reg Neg Lim].

Output from

Proportional Block

Output from

Integrator Block

+

Spd Reg Pos Lim

Spd Reg Neg Lim

102

103

Limit

Speed Regulator Output Filter

Now the torque reference goes through a lead/lag filter, tuned by parameter 95

[SregOut FiltGain] and 96 [Sreg Out Filt BW]. For more information on lead/lag

filters refer to Lead-Lag Filter on page 2-40 .

Parameter 157 [Logic Ctrl State] bit 8 - "Spd Reg En" indicates when the speed regulator is enabled. When "Spd Reg En" is on, this allows the speed regulator output to pass to the torque control loop.

Parameter 302 [Spd Reg PI Out] contains the filtered, limited torque reference that was generated by the speed regulator.


Logic Ctrl State

(Spd Reg En)

157 08

SRegOut FiltGain

95

SReg Out Filt BW

96

(kn * s)+ wn s + wn

Lead Lag

0

0

1

Spd Reg PI Out

302 to Torque Control

[4A1]

Speed Regulator Tuning

Basic Tuning Procedure with a Gearbox or Belt

1. Identify motor and system inertia (in seconds).

The motor inertia can be determined by performing an inertia test with the motor uncoupled from the load, or the motor inertia in seconds can be calculated using the following formula: where WK

2

is the inertia in lbft

2

, RPM is the base motor speed of the motor, and

T acc

is the rated torque of the motor in lbft. T acc

can be calculated by the following: where HP is the nameplate horsepower of the motor and RPM is the base motor speed of the motor.

System Inertia (parameter 9 [Total Inertia]) is determined by performing the inertia test with the load coupled, or the value (in seconds) can be calculated using the formulas above if WK

2

is known for the system.

2-126


2. Set the desired bandwidth in parameter 90 [Spd Reg BW]. Do not exceed the bandwidth limit of curve 1 in the following chart (based on the ratio of motor inertia to system inertia).

3. Make parameter 89 [Spd Err Filt BW] = 5 * parameter 90 [Spd Reg BW].

Note: For speed regulator bandwidths up to approximately 200 rad/sec, parameter 89 [Spd Err Filt BW] can be left at the factory default of 700 rad/sec starting with v2.003 firmware because of the addition of a finite infinite response (FIR) filter.

4. Turn-off Lead Lag filters; parameter 93 [SregFB Filt Gain] =1, parameter 95

[SregOut FiltGain] = 1.

5. Run the drive and observe its performance, particularly gear noise (chatter).

6. If performance is smooth throughout the speed range, the test is complete and no further adjustments are necessary. If gear noise or chatter is present, reduce parameter 90 [Spd Reg BW] or progressively turn on the lead lag filters a through d, with d being the most aggressive. Stop when performance is sufficiently smooth:

a. Parameter 95 [SregOut FiltGain] = 0.7; parameter 96 [SregOut Filt BW] =

35

b. Parameter 95 [SregOut FiltGain] = 0.5; parameter 96 [SregOut Filt BW] =

20

c. parameter 95 [SregOut FiltGain] and parameter 93 [SRegFB Filt Gain] =

0.7; parameter 94 [SReg FB Filt BW] and parameter 96 [SregOut Filt BW] =

35

d. parameter 95 [SregOut FiltGain] and parameter 93 [SRegFB Filt Gain] =

0.5; parameter 94 [SReg FB Filt BW] and parameter 96 [SregOut Filt BW] =

20


7. If gear noise or chatter is still present after turning on the filters, repeat steps 2 through 6 with a lower speed regulator BW (parameter 90 [Spd Reg BW]).

8. If the desired bandwidth cannot be achieved due to gear noise or chatter, follow the procedure for

Advanced Tuning for the Speed Regulator with Gearbox or

Belt below.

Advanced Tuning for the Speed Regulator with Gearbox or Belt

When using a system with a gearbox or belts, the backlash or lost motion can cause instability. The inertia adaptation feature can be used to alleviate this instability.

Follow the steps below to use inertia adaptation:

1. Identify motor and system inertia (in seconds).

The motor inertia can be determined by performing an inertia test with the motor uncoupled from the load, or the motor inertia in seconds can be calculated using the following formula: where WK

2

is the inertia in lbft

2

, RPM is the base motor speed of the motor, and

T acc

is the rated torque of the motor in lbft. T acc

can be calculated by the following: where HP is the nameplate horsepower of the motor and RPM is the base motor speed of the motor.

System Inertia (parameter 9 [Total Inertia]) is determined by performing the inertia test with the load coupled, or the value (in seconds) can be calculated using the formulas above if WK

2

is known for the system.

2. Set parameter 90 [Spd Reg BW]. Do not exceed the bandwidth limit of curve 2 in the following chart (based on the ratio of motor inertia to system inertia).

2-128


3. Set parameter 133 [Inert Adapt BW] = parameter 90 [Spd Reg BW]

4. Verify that Lead Lag filters are off: Parameter 93 [SRegFB Filt Gain] = 1 and parameter 95 [SReg Out Filt Gain] = 1 to disable the filters.

5. Enable inertia adaptation, parameter 132 [Inert Adapt Sel] bit 0 "Inertia Adapt"

= 1.

6. Enable the drive and adjust the BW for the application but do not exceed curve 2

(as shown in the chart above). When you adjust the BW, you must set [Spd Reg

BW] and [Inert Adapt BW] to the same BW.

7. You may hear an unusual high frequency sound which indicates adaptation is active.

Speed/Torque Select

The Speed/Torque Mode Select parameter is used to choose the operating mode for the drive. The drive can be programmed to operate as a velocity regulator, a torque regulator, or a combination of the two. Refer to the firmware flowchart shown in

Firmware FlowchartFigure 2.27

.

Spd Reg PI Out

[3H4]

Inertia Torq Add

[2H4]

FricComp TorqAdd

[2H3]

Torque Ref 1

Torq Ref1 Div

111

112

Torque Ref 2

Torq Ref2 Multi

113

114

Torque Trim 115

Figure 2.27 Firmware Flowchart

Spd/Torq ModeSel 110 from Speed Control

302

59

145

+

+

+

0

Min

/

Max

+

+

5

6

3

4

0

1

2

X

+

+

+

Abs

Min

Logic Ctrl State

(Forced Spd)

157 10

0

1

Torque Step 116

+

+


As shown in

Figure 2.27

, parameter 110 [Spd/Trq Mode Sel], is used to select the

mode of operation. Zero torque current is allowed when set to zero (0).

Set to a value of 1, the drive and motor are operated in speed mode. The torque command changes as needed to maintain the desired speed.

Set [Spd/Trq Mode Sel] to a value of two (2) for torque mode. In torque regulation mode, the drive controls the desired motor torque. The motor speed is the result of torque command and load present at the motor shaft.

Min and Max mode are selected by values three (3) and four (4) respectively. These modes offer a combination of speed and torque operation. The algebraic minimum or maximum of speed/torque will be the operating point for the Min and Max modes. The drive automatically switches from speed to torque mode (or from torque to speed) based on the dynamics of the motor/load.

The Min mode is typically used with positive torque and forward speed operation, the minimum of the two being closest to zero. The Max mode is opposite, typically used with reverse speed and negative torque, the maximum being the least negative

(closest to zero).

Sum mode is selected when [Spd/Trq Mode Sel] is set to a value of 5. This mode allows an external torque command to be added to the speed regulator output when desired.

Speed Regulation Mode

Operating as a speed regulator is the most common and simplest mode to set up.

Examples of speed regulated applications are blowers, conveyors, feeders, pumps, saws, and tools.

In a speed regulated application, the speed regulator output generates the torque reference. Note that under steady state conditions the speed feedback is steady while the torque reference is a constantly adjusting signal. This is required to maintain the desired speed. In a transient state, the torque reference changes dramatically to compensate for a speed change. A short duration change in speed is the result of increasing or decreasing the load very rapidly.

Note:

Inertia Torque Add and Friction Compensation Torque Add are summed with the output of the speed regulator. See

Inertia

Compensation on page 2-59 and

Friction Compensation on page 2-47

.

Torque Regulation Mode

A torque regulated application can be described as any process requiring some tension control. An example is a winder or unwinder with material being "drawn" or pulled with a specific tension required. The process requires another element setting the speed. Configuring the drive for torque regulation requires [Spd/Trq

Mode Sel] to be set to 2. In addition, a reference signal must be linked to the Torque

Reference. If an analog signal is used for the reference, link parameter 800 [Anlg

In1 Data] to parameter 111 [Torque Ref 1].

When operating in a torque mode, the motor current will be adjusted to achieve the desired torque. If the material being wound/unwound breaks, the load will decrease dramatically and the motor can potentially go into a "runaway" condition.

2-130


Torque Ref 1

Torq Ref1 Div

Torque Ref 2

Torq Ref2 Multi

Torque Trim

111

112

113

114

115

X

/

+

+

+

Torque Reference:

Parameter 111 [Torque Ref 1] is divided by parameter 112 [Torq Ref1 Div]

Parameter 113 [Torque Ref 2] is multiplied by parameter 114 [Torq Ref2 Mult]

Parameter 115 [Torque Trim] can be used to trim the torque. For example, [Torque

Trim] can be linked to an analog input or to the Process PI output.

The final torque reference, in the Torque Mode, is the sum of scaled [Torque Ref 1], scaled [Torque Ref 2], and [Torque Trim].

Min Mode / Max Mode

This operating mode compares the speed and torque commands. The algebraically minimum value is used. This mode can be thought of as a Speed Limited

Adjustable Torque operation. Instead of operating the drive as a pure torque regulator, the "runaway" condition can be avoided by limiting the speed. A winder is a good example for the application of the Min Spd/Trq operating mode. Max mode would be used if both speed and torque are negative.

Figure 2.28

illustrates how min. mode operates. The drive starts out operating as a

torque regulator. The torque reference causes the motor to operate at 308rpm. The speed reference is 468rpm, so the minimum is to operate as a torque regulator.

While operating in torque regulation, the load decreases and the motor speeds up.

Notice the torque command has not changed. When the speed regulator comes out of saturation, it clamps the speed and now the drive operates as a speed regulator.

The At Speed Relay then closes.

Figure 2.28 Min Mode Operation


Sum Mode

Configuring the drive in this mode allows an external torque input to be summed with the torque command generated by the speed regulator. The drive requires both a speed reference and a torque reference to be linked. This mode can be used for applications that have precise speed changes with critical time constraints. If the torque requirement and timing is known for a given speed change, then the external torque input can be used to preload the integrator. The timing of the speed change and the application of an external torque command change must be coordinated for this mode to be useful. The sum mode will then work as a feed forward to the torque regulator.

Zero Torque Mode

Operation in zero torque mode allows the motor to be fully fluxed and ready to rotate when a speed command or torque command is given. This mode can be used for a cyclical application where through put is a high priority. The control logic can select zero torque during the "rest" portion of a machine cycle instead of stopping the drive. When the cycle start occurs, instead of issuing a start to the drive, a speed regulate mode can be selected. The drive will then immediately accelerate the motor without the need for "flux up" time.

Note:

Zero Torque may excessively heat the motor if operated in this mode for extended periods of time. No load or flux current is still present when the drive is operating in zero torque mode. A motor with an extended speed range or separate cooling methods

(blower) may be required.

2-132


Start Inhibits

Start/Stop Modes

Absolute Min Mode

Absolute Min Mode selects the smallest absolute algebraic value to regulate to when the torque reference and torque generated from the speed regulator are compared.

This section covers Start Inhibits, parameter 156 [Run Inhibit Stat]. This parameter indicates the cause of no response to a start request.

11

12

13

14

7

8

9

10

5

6

3

4

1

2

Bit 0

0

Description

Drive is Faulted

No Enable signal present

Software Ramp Stop request present

Software Coast Stop request present

Software Current Limit Stop request present

Power Loss

Power EE prom error

Flash upgrade in progress

Start request present

Jog request present

Encoder PPR error

Bus Precharge not complete

Digital input configuration error

Motin Shtdwn

Permanent Magnet motor Feedback Error

Description

This section serves as a supplement to the PowerFlex 700S Users Manual

(20D-UM001) addressing items specific to the PowerFlex 700S start and stop modes.


The start and stop mode refers to how you want the drive's start and stop to be controlled. There are two basic modes of start and stop control: 3-wire and 2-wire.

3-wire control indicates that the start and stop are momentary inputs. 3-wire control also indicates that there is one input for the start command, and one input for the stop command. The term "3-wire" comes from the fact that when using this type of control with digital inputs, one wire is used for the start input, one wire is used for the stop input, and one wire is used for the common.

2-wire control indicates that the start and stop are combined as one maintained input. The input must be on to start and to remain running. Then the same input is turned off to stop. The term "2-wire" comes from the fact then when using this type of control with digital inputs, one wire is used for the combined start/stop input, and one wire is used for the common.

For the stop command, there are three different types of stopping that can be performed: coast stop, ramp stop, and current limit stop.


1. Coast Stop - when in coast stop, the drive acknowledges the stop command by shutting off the output transistors and releasing control of the motor. The load/ motor will coast or free spin until the mechanical energy is dissipated.

2. Ramp Stop - when in ramp stop, the drive acknowledges the stop command by ramping down the motor speed reference using the programmed parameter 33

[Decel Time], maintaining control of the motor until the drive output reaches zero. The output transistors are then shut off.

3. Current Limit Stop - when in current limit stop, the drive acknowledges the stop command by setting the motor speed reference to zero, causing the drive to bring the motor down to zero speed as fast as the power limits, torque limits and current limits will allow. When the drive output reaches zero, the output transistors are shut off.

When different stop types are commanded at the same time, the priority from highest priority to lowest is coast stop, current limit stop, and then ramp stop.

The remainder of this section describes how to configure the drive for the different start and stop modes.

Configuring the Start and Stop for 3-Wire Control (Momentary Start and

Stop)

To configure the drive for 3-wire control with a ramp stop:

For parameter 153 [Control Options], set bit 8 “3WireControl” to on (1) and set bits

3 “2WCurrLimStp” and 9 “2W CoastStop” to off (0).

To control from digital inputs:

1. Set parameter 839 [DigIn2 Sel] = 1 "Normal Stop" or = 5 "Stop - CF". "Stop -

CF" indicates that the same digital input is used as a stop and a clear fault.

2. Set parameter 840 [DigIn3 Sel] = 2 "Start".

To control from a communication network:

1. To perform a ramp stop, toggle bit 0 "Normal Stop" in the logic command word on and then off.

2. To perform a start, toggle bit 1 "Start" in the logic command word on and then off.

To configure the drive for 3-wire control with a coast stop:




1. Set parameter 839 [DigIn2 Sel] = 10 "Coast Stop"

2. Set parameter 840 [DigIn3 Sel] = 2 "Start"


1. To perform a coast stop, toggle bit 9 "Coast Stop" in the logic command word on and then off.


2-134


To configure the drive for 3-wire control with a current limit stop:




1. Set parameter 839 [DigIn2 Sel] = 9 "Current Limit Stop"

2. Set parameter 840 [DigIn3 Sel] = 2 "Start"


1. To perform a current limit stop, toggle bit 8 "CurrLim Stop" in the logic command word on and then off.


Note: In 3-wire mode, all stops commanded from pressing the HIM stop button are ramp stops.

Configuring the Start and Stop for 2-Wire Control (Maintained Start and

Stop)

To configure the drive for 2-wire control with a ramp stop:

For parameter 153 [Control Options], set bits 3 “2WCurrLimStp”, 8

“3WireControl”, and 9 “2W CoastStop” to off (0).


– Set parameter 839 [DigIn2 Sel] = 3 "Run"


– To perform a ramp stop, toggle bit 1 "Start" in the logic command word on and then off.

To control from the HIM:

– Hold down the start button to run and release the start button to perform a ramp stop.

To configure the drive for 2-wire control with a coast stop:

For parameter 153 [Control Options] set bit 9 “2W CoastStop” to on (1) and set bits

3 “2WCurrLimStp” and 8 “3WireControl” off (0).




– To perform a coast stop, toggle bit 1 "Start" in the logic command word on and then off.


– Hold down the start button to run and release the start button to perform a coast stop.

Note: When P153 [Control Options] bit 9 is on, and bits 3 and 8 are off all other stop commands become coast stops because of the priority of the stop

Start-Up

Stop Modes

SynchLink

Detailed Drive Operation 2-135 types. For example, if you try to command a ramp stop or current limit stop from a communication network, the drive will still perform a coast stop.

To configure the drive for 2-wire control with a current limit stop:

For parameter 153 [Control Options], set bits 3 “2WCurrLimStp” to on (1) and bits

8 “3WireControl” and 9 “2W CoastStop” to off (0).




– To perform a current limit stop, Toggle bit 1 "Start" in the logic command word on and then off.


– Hold down the start button to run and release the start button to perform a current limit stop

Note: When parameter 153 [Control Options] bit 3 is on, and bits 8 and 9 are off the ramp (normal) stop becomes a current limit stop. For example, if you try to command a ramp stop from a communication network, the drive will still perform a current limit stop. A coast stop can still be performed by commanding a coast stop.

Refer to

Autotune on page 2-4 for Autotune portion of Start-Up.

Refer to

Start/Stop Modes on page 2-132

.

This section contains information specific to PowerFlex 700S SynchLink parameters and gives an example of setting up the PowerFlex 700S SynchLink using DriveExecutive™. Please refer to the SynchLink System Design Guide, publication 1756-TD008, for PowerFlex 700S SynchLink topologies, hardware and wiring details.


SynchLink data is transmitted as a combination of direct and buffered data. The following table shows the different formats supported by the PowerFlex 700S for transmit/receive data and the respective SynchLink fiber update rates for the direct and buffered data.

# of Direct Words Direct Word Update # of Buffered Words Buffered Word Update

2 50 µSec 18 0.5 ms

4

4

50 µSec

50 µSec

18

8

1 ms

0.5 ms

2-136


SynchLink Configuration

Parameter 1000 [SL Node Cnfg] is broken down into 3 bits:

• Bit 1 - “Time Keeper” - This bit is turned on in the SynchLink master. Only one node in a SynchLink network can be the time keeper.

• Bit 2 - “Reserved” - Not used.

• Bit 3 - “Synch Now” - Selecting this bit enables the "Synch Now" synchronization mode. This mode will cause the drive's system clock to synchronize to the time keeper as quickly as possible. Deselecting this bit enables the "Synch Fast" synchronization mode. This method will take longer to synchronize the drive's system clock to the time keeper, but has less impact on other tasks running in the drive. Synchronization only occurs on a drive power-up or initialization.

Parameter 1010 [SL Rx Comm Frmt] selects the format of data to be received. It can be set to:

• “0A, 0D, 0B”- No data.

• “0A, 2D, 18B” - 2 direct words and 18 buffered words.



Parameters 1011 [SL Rx DirectSel0] through 1014 [SL Rx DirectSel3] select what you want to do with received data. The most common settings for these parameters are:

• “No Data” - SynchLink received data is passed straight through.

• “SL Multiply” - See

Multiply Block on page 2-137 for details.

Parameter 1020 [SL Tx Comm Frmt] selects the format of data to be transmitted. It can be set to:

• “0A, 0D, 0B” - No data.




Parameters 1021 [SL Tx DirectSel0] through 1024 [SL Tx DirectSel3] select what transmit data you wish to send. The most common settings for these parameters are:

• “No Data” - No data is selected for that transmit word.

• “Dir Tx Data” - Use this selection to transmit a parameter.

SynchLink Direct Data

Direct Data Transmit Parameters

Parameter 1140 [Tx Dir Data Type] bits 0 through 3 select whether the direct data words transmitted over SynchLink will be integer or floating point. When the bit is turned off, it means the data transmitted will be integer. When the bit is turned on, it means the data transmitted will be floating point.

Odd parameters 1141 [SL Dir Int Tx0] through 1147 [SL Dir Int Tx3] contain the integer values for data transmitted to SynchLink. These parameters can be linked to integer source parameters.


Even parameters 1142 [SL Dir Real Tx0] through 1148 [SL Dir Real Tx3] contain the floating-point values for data transmitted to SynchLink. These parameters can be linked to floating-point source parameters.

Direct Data Receive Parameters

Even parameters 1054 [SL Dir Int Rx0] through 1060 [SL Dir Int Rx3] contain the integer values for data received from SynchLink. An integer destination parameter can be linked to these parameters.

Odd parameters 1055 [SL Dir Real Rx0] through 1061 [SL Dir Real Rx3] contain the floating-point values for data received from SynchLink. A floating-point destination parameter can be linked to these parameters.

Multiply Block

SynchLink has the ability to take one of the direct data words received from

SynchLink and multiply it by a constant or parameter value for features such as draw control. The multiply function is handled at the hardware level to ensure the highest possible execution speeds. Because of this, the multiply function is integer based.

Preparing Floating-Point Data in the Transmitting Drive

If the received data to be multiplied is floating point, it must first be converted from floating point to integer in the transmitting drive. A floating point to integer conversion has been provided for this purpose.

Parameter 1032 [SL Mult Base] sets the value to multiply parameter 1035 [Real to

Int In] before sending it out over SynchLink. Make sure this parameter is set appropriately so that the integer value sent over SynchLink has enough resolution.

Parameter 1034 [SL Mult State] contains overflow bits if the data for the multiply block is too large. It is broken down into the following bits:

• Bit 0 - “Local Ovflow” - The result of the multiply function is too large.

• Bit 1 - “Rx Ovflow” - The data received from SynchLink is too large.

• Bit 2 - Not used

• Bit 3 - “FtoI Ovflow” - In the master, the data converted from floating point to integer is too large.

Parameter 1035 [Real to Int In] is linked to the parameter that you want to multiply.

Parameter 1036 [Real to Int Out] contains the integer value sent over SynchLink.

One of the SynchLink direct integer transmit words (parameter 1141, 1143, 1145, or 1147) must be linked to parameter 1036 to send the value over SynchLink.

For example, to use the multiply block to scale the s-curved speed reference and send it over SynchLink, link parameter 1035 [Real to Int In] to parameter 43 [S

Curve Spd Ref]. Set parameter 1032 [SL Mult Base] to 10,000. Then link parameter 1141 [SL Dir Int Tx0] to parameter 1036 [Real to Int Out]. Set parameter

1021 [SL Tx DirectSL0] = 21 - “Dir Tx Data”.

Configuring the Multiply Block in the Receiving Drive

Select on which received direct word to use the multiply block by setting one of the following parameters: 1011 [SL Rx DirectSel0], 1012 [SL Rx DirectSel1], 1013

[SL Rx DirectSel2], or 1014 [SL Rx DirectSel3] to 1 - "SL Multiply". The receive

2-138

Detailed Drive Operation parameter selected to multiply in the receiving drive must correspond to the transmit parameter selected to be multiplied from the transmitting drive. The result of the multiply function can be used in the receiving drive, or transmitted directly to another drive.

Parameter 1030 [SL Mult A In] contains the value received from SynchLink after it was divided by [SL Mult Base].

Parameter 1031 [SL Mult B In] contains the multiply scale factor to multiply by the value received from SynchLink. Note that [SL Mult B In] could be a constant or linked to a source parameter.

Parameter 1032 [SL Mult Base] contains the base to convert integer data received from SynchLink back to floating-point data. Usually, [SL Mult Base] will be set the same in the transmitting and receiving drive.

Parameter 1033 [SL Mult Out] contains the result of the multiply block. A destination parameter can be linked to [SL Mult Out].

Parameter 1034 [SL Mult State] contains overflow bits if the data for the multiply block is too large. It is broken down into the following bits:

• Bit 0 - “Local Ovflow” - The result of the multiply function is too large.

• Bit 1 - “Rx Ovflow” - The data received from SynchLink is too large.

• Bit 2 - Not used

• Bit 3 - “FtoI Ovflow” - In the transmitting drive, the data converted from floating point to integer is too large.

For example, to receive the S-curved speed reference from the master and scale it by 0.5, set parameter 1011 [SL Rx DirectSel 0] to “SL Multiply.” Set parameter

1031 [SL Mult B In] to 0.5. Set parameter 1032 [SL Mult Base] to 10,000. Link parameter 37 [Spd Ref Bypass] equal to parameter 1033 [SL Mult Out].

Buffered Data

Buffered Data Transmit Parameters

Parameter 1160 [Tx Buf Data Type], bits 0 through 29, select whether each word of buffered data that is transmitted is integer or floating-point. Data is transmitted as integer when a bit is turned off. Data is transmitted as floating-point when a bit is turned on.

Odd parameters 1161 [SL Buf Int Tx00] through 1219 [SL Buf Int Tx29] are linked to integer parameters that you want to send out over SynchLink as buffered data.

Note that at this time, the maximum number of buffered words that can be sent over

SynchLink is 18, so only odd parameters 1161 [SL Buf Int Tx00] through 1195 [SL

Buf Int Tx17] would be used.

Even parameters 1162 [SL Buf Real Tx00] through 1220 [SL Buf Real Tx29] are linked to floating-point parameters that you want to send out over SynchLink as buffered data. Note that at this time, the maximum number of buffered words that can be sent over SynchLink is 18, so only odd parameters 1162 [SL Buf Real Tx00] through 1196 [SL Buf Real Tx17] would be used.

Buffered Data Receive Parameters

Odd parameters 1073 [SL Buf Int Rx00] through 1131 [SL Buf Int Rx29] contain integer values that you receive from SynchLink as buffered data. Destination


Event Data

1033

Registration Latches (Local)

P0 Regis Latch

235

P1 Regis Latch

245

(Select = 2)

(Select = 3)

Opt 0 Regis Ltch

Opt 1 Regis Ltch

253

XXX

(Select = 8)

(Select = 9) "Not Used"

Tx Dir Data Type (1=Real)

1140

3 2 1 0

SL Dir (type) Tx0

Int Real

1141 1143

(Select = 21)

SL Dir (type) Tx1

SL Dir (type) Tx2

SL Dir (type) Tx3

1143 1144

1145 1146

1147 1148

Direct

Transmit

Data

(Select = 22)

Direct

'passthrough'

Data from Rx

(Select = 23)

Encoder 0 Accum

230

(Select = 24)

Encoder 1 Accum

240

(Select = 25)

Opt 0 Accum

250

(Select = 26) "Not Used"

Opt 1 Accum

XXX

Tx Port Comm Format

SL Buf (type) Tx02

Int Real

1161 1162

Coordinated

System

Time

1020

Tx Buf Data Type (1 = real)

1160 31

0

SL Buf (type) Tx31 1219 1220

Buffered

Transmit

Data parameters that are integers can be linked to this buffered data. Note that at this time, the maximum number of buffered words that can be received over SynchLink is 18, so only odd parameters 1073 [SL Buf Int Rx00] through 1107 [SL Buf Int

Rx17] would be used.

Even parameters 1074 [SL Buf Real Rx00] through 1132 [SL Buf Real Rx29] contain floating-point values that you receive from SynchLink as buffered data.

Destination parameters that are floating-point values can be linked to this buffered data. Note that at this time, the maximum number of buffered words that can be received over SynchLink is 18, so only even parameters 1074 [SL Buf Real Rx00] through 1108 [SL Buf Real Rx17] would be used.

Table 2.L SynchLink Transmit Block Diagram

0

1021

Direct Tx Data Select

1

2

1022

1023

3

1024 (0-26)

Tx Port Comm Format

1020 (0-17)

SycnhLink

Fiber

Tx

Direct Data

Selector

Tx Format

Selector

Synchlink

Transmit Port

Data (Tx) to

Downstream

Node

Buffered Transmit Data

SL Comm TP Sel

1226

1227 SL Comm TP Data

15

19

20

21

22

16

17

18

Tx Axis Size

Tx Dir Size

Tx Buff Size

Tx Pkg Size

Tx Seq Cnt

Tx Index 0

Tx Index 1

Tx Index 2

2-140


Rx Port Comm Format

1010

(0-17)

SycnhLink

Fiber

Synchlink

Receive Port

Data (Rx) to

Upstream

Node

Rx Axis Size

Rx Dir Size

Rx Buff Size

Rx Pkg Size

Rx Seq Cnt

Rx Index 0

Rx Index 1

Rx Index 2

9

10

7

8

11

12

5

6

Rx Format

Selector

Figure 2.29 Sync hLink Receive Block Diagram

See Table 1 on page 12 of SynchLink System Spec.

Defines number of Axis, Buffered & Direct words.

0

1011

Direct Rx Data Select

1

2 3

1012

1013 1014

Rx Direct

Data

Selector

(0-10)

SL Mult A In

1030

(sel = 1)

1031

SL Mult B In

SL Mult Base

1032

AxB

SynchLink

Multipy

SL Mult A In

1033

(sel = 1)

Tx Multiply Data

1034

0

Local Overflow

1

Rx Overflow

(sel = 2-10)

2

4

Event

Latches

(Upstream)

5

6

7

8

3

9

10

1041

1042

1043

1044

1045

1046

1047

1048

1040

Rx P0 Register

Rx P1 Register

Rx D0 Latch

Rx D1 Latch

Rx D2 Latch

Rx D3 Latch

Rx Opt 0 Regis

Rx Opt 1 Regis

Receive Events

(sel = 2-10)

SL Comm TP Sel

1226 1227

SL Comm TP Data

Int

1054

Real

1055

1056

1057

1058 1059

SL Dir (type) Rx 0

SL Dir (type) Rx 1

SL Dir (type) Rx 2

1060

1061

Coordinated

System

Time

SL Dir (type) Rx 3

Int Real

1070

1072

1069

1071

SL Buf (type) Rx 00

SL Buf (type) Rx 01

Available for

Tx

"passthrough data"

Buffered

Receive

Data

Int

1074

Real

1073

SL Buf (type) Rx 02

64 Parameters

1132 1131

SL Buf (type) Rx 31


Speed Synchronization Example:

This example describes how to setup SynchLink to synchronize the ramped, s-curved speed reference for two PowerFlex® 700S drives using DriveExecutive™.

Note that the “Peer Communication” setup in DriveExecutive configures the appropriate SynchLink parameters for you as you go through the setup.

Once connected to the drive, select Peer Communication from the Drive menu on the Menu bar.

A dialog box similar to the one shown below displays. This is the dialog box used to setup SynchLink communication.

2-142


Master PowerFlex® 700S Drive Setup (Transmitting Drive)

1. In the master, or transmitting drive, select the desired transmittal format in the

SynchLink Transmit Format field. For this example, select “4 Direct Words, 8

Buffered Words”.

2. In the Transmitted Direct Words section, select “Drive Parameter” in the

Source 0 field and parameter “43 - S Curve Spd Ref” in the Item 0 field.

3. Click the button.


4. In the “Parameter 1000 - SL Node Cnfg” Properties dialog box, uncheck “Sync

Now” and check the “Time Keeper” box. The master drive is now the time keeper for SynchLink.

5. Click the OK button. The SynchLink communication dialog box re-displays.

6. Click the OK button to accept the settings.

7. To synchronize the speed references, you must add a time delay to the S-Curve speed reference of the master. To do this, open the Properties dialog box for

Parameter 37 [Spd Ref Bypass].

8. Click on the “Link Data” tab.

9. Select “(P 45) Delayed Spd Ref” in the Selected Parameter list.

10. Click the OK button to accept the setting.

2-144


Follower PowerFlex 700S Setup (Receiving Drive)

1. In the slave drive, select “4 Direct Words, 8 Buffered Words” in the SynchLink

Receive Format field, to match the size of the data transmitted from the master drive.

2. If desired, the multiply block can be used to change the scaling of one of the

Direct Words coming from the master to the follower. For example, the multiply block might be used to enter a gear ratio for the speed reference.

3. Click the button.


4. In the “Parameter 1000 - SL Node Cnfg” Properties dialog box, verify that only the “Sync Now” box is checked (this is the factory default).

5. Click the OK button. The SynchLink communication dialog box re-displays.

6. Click the OK button to accept the settings.

7. You must link the speed reference bypass of the follower to Word 0 of Direct

Data coming over SynchLink. To do this, open the Properties dialog box for

Parameter 37 [Spd Ref Bypass].

8. Click on the “Link Data” tab.

9. Select “(P 1055 SL Dir Real Rx0)” in the Selected Parameters list.

10. Click the OK button to accept the setting.

2-146


Sync Generator

Note that by linking to Spd Ref Bypass of the follower, we bypassed the ramp and

S-Curve of the follower. This is because the reference is already ramped and

S-Curved by the master. This way, both drives follow exactly the same ramp.

Cycle Power

• You must power down all drives before SynchLink changes take effect.

• First apply power to the Master. The SynchLink LED should be solid green. The

SynchLink LED is on the top right of the MCB and is visible through the window on the control assembly.

• When power is applied to the follower(s), the SynchLink LED on the follower should be a solid light after about 1 minute.

The synch generator can be used to synchronize a parameter and delay it one scan.

This can be used in conjunction with SynchLink (Refer to

SynchLink on page 2-135 for more information).

Sync Generator

Xsync In 1

788 Latch

Xsync In 2

790 Latch

One

Scan

Delay

789

Xsync Out 1

791

Xsync Out 2

792

Xsync Out 2 Dly

Xsync In 3

793 Latch

One

Scan

Delay

794

Xsync Out 3

795

Xsync Out 3 Dly

0.5ms

SL System Time

317

0.5ms

Xsync Gen Period

787

0.5ms * 2

(p787)

Sync Pulse Generator

786 00

Xsync Status

(Sync Pulse)

Test Points

Thermal Regulator

Torque Reference


Configuration:

• Parameters 788 [Xsync In 1] and 789 [Xsync Out 1] can be used to synchronize a Dint parameter.

• Parameters 790 [Xsync In2 ] through 792 [Xsynch Out 2 Dly] can be used to synchronize a Dint parameter and delay it one scan.

• Parameters 793 [Xsync In3 ] through 795 [Xsynch Out 3 Dly] can be used to synchronize a floating point parameter and delay it one scan.

• Parameter 787 [Xsync Gen Period] sets the scan time of the synch generator.

The following options are available:

0 =

1 =

2 =

2 msec

4 msec

8 msec

3 =

4 =

The default setting is 1 = “4 msec”.

16 msec

32 msec

Test points are used to monitor values in the drive for diagnostic information.

[xxxx TP Sel] selects a value to monitor for diagnostics.

[xxxx TP Data] shows the value selected by [xxxx TP Sel].

Refer to

Drive Overload on page 2-34 .

When the PowerFlex 700S is operated in Torque mode, an external signal is used for a Torque reference. Refer to

Figure 2.30

for the firmware diagram.

Figure 2.30 Torque Reference Firmware Diagram

Torque Ref 1

Torque Ref1 Div

111

112

/

Torque Ref 2

Torque Ref2 Mult

113

114

X

+

+

+

Torque Trim

115

Torque Reference Input

Parameter 111 [Torque Ref 1] is used to supply an external reference for desired torque. The scaling of this parameter is a per unit type, where a value of 1.0 is equal to the rated motor torque. The range is from -2200000000 to +2200000000.

[Torque Ref 1] is then divided by parameter 112 [Torq Ref1 Div]. This defines the scaled [Torque Ref 1].

2-148


Parameter 113 [Torque Ref 2] is used to supply an external reference for desired torque. The scaling of this parameter is a per unit type, where a value of 1.0 is equal to the rated motor torque. The range is from -2200000000 to +2200000000.

[Torque Ref 2] is then multiplied by parameter 114 [Torq Ref2 Mult]. This defines the scaled [Torque Ref 2].

The torque reference can be utilized when a master/slave multi-drive system is configured. The torque reference into the "slave" can be scaled to create the proper torque output. Keep in mind that the motors may be different ratings and this function is used to help the "system" share the load.

Parameter 115 [Torque Trim] can be used to trim the torque.For example, [Torque

Trim] can be limited to an analog input or to the Process PI output.

Once the scaling is complete on both [Torque Ref 1] and [Torque Ref 2], the output is summed with the output of the [Torque Trim].

Unbalanced or Ungrounded

Distribution Systems

Unbalanced Distribution Systems

This drive is designed to operate on three-phase supply systems whose line voltages are symmetrical. Surge suppression devices are included to protect the drive from lightning induced overvoltages between line and ground. Where the potential exists for abnormally high phase-to-ground voltages (in excess of 125% of nominal), or where the supply ground is tied to another system or equipment that could cause the ground potential to vary with operation, suitable isolation is required for the drive.

Where this potential exists, an isolation transformer is strongly recommended.

Ungrounded Distribution Systems

All drives are equipped with an MOV (Metal Oxide Varistor) that provides voltage surge protection and phase-to-phase plus phase-to-ground protection which is designed to meet IEEE 587. The MOV circuit is designed for surge suppression only (transient line protection), not continuous operation.

With ungrounded distribution systems, the phase-to-ground MOV connection could become a continuous current path to ground. Energy ratings are listed below.

Exceeding the published phase-to-phase or phase-to-ground energy ratings may cause physical damage to the MOV.

Three-Phase

AC Input

R

S

T

Ground

Joules (J)

Joules (J)

Joules (J)

Joules (J)

1 2 3 4

Phase-to-Phase MOV Rating

Includes 2 Phase-Phase MOVs

Phase-to-Ground MOV Rating

Includes Phase-Phase & Phase-Ground MOVs

Device Rating (V AC)

Phase-Phase Total

Phase-Ground Total

240 480/600

160J 320J

220J 380J

240/480 600

280J 320J

360J 410J

240/480 600

280J 300J

360J 370J


PowerFlex drives contain protective MOVs and common mode capacitors that are referenced to ground. To guard against drive damage, these devices should be disconnected if the drive is installed on an ungrounded distribution system where the line-to-ground voltages on any phase could exceed 125% of the nominal line-to-line voltage. Refer to your PowerFlex User Manual, 20D-UM001, for details.

User Functions

There are several user functions available in the drive for custom control.

Peak Detect

There are 2 peak detectors that can be used to detect the peak for a parameter value.

Configuration:

• Link parameter 213 [PkDtct1 In Real] or parameter 212 [PkDtct1 In Int] to the parameter that you wish to detect a peak, depending on the data type.

• To detect positive peak values, turn on parameter 210 [PeakDtct Ctrl In] bit 2

"Peak1 Sel". To detect negative peak values, turn off parameter 210 [PeakDtct

Ctrl In] bit 2 "Peak1 Sel".

• The peak value is contained in parameter 215 [Peak Detect1 Out].

• To reset the output of the peak detector, toggle on and then off parameter 210

[PeakDtct Ctrl In] bit 0 "Peak 1 Set". The output will match the value in parameter 214 [PeakDtct1 Preset], which is a default of 0.

• To hold the output of the peak detector at the present value, turn on parameter

210 [PeakDtct Ctrl In] bit 1 "Peak 1 Hold".

The change bit, parameter 211 [PeakDtct Status] bit 0 "Peak 1 Chng" is set to

“true” for one scan if the peak detect value changes, otherwise the change bit is set to “False”. The change bit is also set to “False” if the detector is in Set or Hold mode.

PkDtct1 In Real

PeakDtct1 In Int

213

212

OR

PeakDtct1 Ctrl In

210 2

(Peak 1 Sel)

Inv

Peak Ctrl Status

211 0 (Peak 1 Chng)

PeakDtct1 Ctrl In

210 1 (Peak 1 Hold)

PeakDtct1 Ctrl In

210 0 (Peak 1 Set)

PkDtct2 In Real

PeakDtct2 In Int

217

216

PeakDtct1 Preset 214

Peak Detect1 Out

215

OR

PeakDtct Ctrl In

210 6 (Peak 2 Sel)

Inv

Peak Ctrl Status

211 1 (Peak 2 Chng)

PeakDtct2 Ctrl In

210 5

(Peak 2 Hold)

PeakDtct2 Ctrl In

210 4 (Peak 2 Set)

Peak Detect2 Out

219

PeakDtct2 Preset

NOTE:

The change bit , Peak x Chng (where x = 1 or 2), is set TRUE if the peak detect value changes, otherwise the change bit is set FALSE . Change is also set to FALSE if the detector is in HOLD or SET.

218

2-150


Example:

• Link parameter 213 [PkDtct1 In Real] to parameter 300 [Motor Spd Fdbk].

• Verify that parameter 210 [PeakDtct Ctrl In] bit 0 "Peak 1 Set" and bit 1 "Peak 1

Hold" are off.

• For parameter 210 [PeakDtct Ctrl In], turn on bit 2 "Peak1 Sel".

• Parameter 215 [Peak Detect1 Out ] will contain the positive peak value of

[Motor Spd Fdbk].

• To reset the output of the peak detector, parameter 210 [PeakDtct Ctrl In] toggle on and then off bit 0 "Peak 1 Set".

Selector Switches

There are two (2) different selector switches available:

1. A switch that selects between two (2) Dint values. The result is Dint.

2. A switch that selects between two (2) floating-point values. The result is floating point.

2 Position Dint Switch

Switch Control

(SW Int 1 On)

1370 1

SW Int 1 NO

1371

SW Int 1 NC

1372

1

0

1373 SW Int 1 Output

Configuration:

• Parameter 1370 [Switch Control] bit 1 "SW Int 1 On" activates the switch.

• The value of parameter 1371 [SW Int 1 NO] is moved into parameter 1373 [SW

Int 1 Output] when bit 1 "SW Int 1 On" of parameter 1370 [Switch Control] is on.

• The value of parameter 1372 [SW Int 1 NC] is moved into parameter 1373 [SW

Int 1 Output] when bit 1 "SW Int 1 On" of parameter 1370 [Switch Control] is off.

• [SW Int 1 Output] contains the value of either [SW Int 1 NO] or [SW Int 1 NC].


2 Position Floating Point Switch

Switch Control

(SW Int 1 On)

1370 1

SW Int 1 NO

1371

SW Int 1 NC

1372

1

0

1373 SW Int 1 Output

Configuration:

• Parameter 1370 [Switch Control] bit 2 "SW Real 1 On" activates the switch.

• The value of parameter 1374 [SW Real 1 NO] is moved into parameter 1376

[SW Real 1 Output] when bit 2 "SW Real 1 On" of parameter 1370 [Switch

Control] is on.

• The value of parameter 1375 [SW Real 1 NC] is moved into parameter 1376

[SW Real 1 Output] when bit 2 "SW Real 1 On" of parameter 1370 [Switch

Control] is off.

• [SW Real 1 Output] contains the value of either [SW Real 1 NO] or [SW Real 1

NC].

Time Axis Generator

Ramps the output of the function generator at the rate in parameter 200 [Time Axis

Rate].

• When parameter 183 [PI Command] bit 1 "Time Lim En" or parameter 151

[Logic Command] bit 3 "Time Axis En" = 1 the output ramps from 0.0000 to

1.0000 at the Time Axis Rate set in [Time Axis Rate].

• When parameter 183 [PI Command] bit 1 "Time Lim En" or parameter 151

[Logic Command] bit 3"Time Axis En" = 0 the output ramps from 1.0000 to

0.0000 at the Time Axis Rate set in [Time Axis Rate].

Time Axis Output

201

Time Axis Rate

200

PI Command

(Time Lim En)

183 1

OR

Logic Command

(Time Axis En)

151 3

Time Func Generator

2-152


Voltage Class

Limit Generator

The limit generator generates a high and low limit based on an input.

• The input parameter 206 [LimGen X axis In] is a linkable destination for floating point parameters. The input range is 0.0000 to 1.0000.

• The output is equal to parameter 205 [LimGen Y axis Mn] when the input is equal to 0.0000.

• The output is equal to parameter 204 [LimGen Y axis Mx] when the input is equal to 1.0000.

• The output is available as a positive output parameter 207 [Limit Gen Hi Out] and a negative output parameter 208 [Limit Gen Lo Out].

LimGen X axis In 206

-1

-1 +1

Limit Generator

Limit Gen Hi Out

207

Limit Gen Lo Out

208

LimGen Y axis Mn 205

LimGen Y axis Mx 204

PowerFlex drives are sometimes referred to by voltage “class.” This class identifies the general input voltage to the drive. This general voltage includes a range of actual voltages. For example, a 400 Volt Class drive will have an input voltage range of 380-480VAC. While the hardware remains the same for each class, other variables, such as factory defaults, catalog number and power unit ratings will change. In most cases, all drives within a voltage class can be reprogrammed to another drive in the class by resetting the defaults to something other than “factory” settings. Parameter 403 [Voltage Class] can be used to reset a drive to a different setup within the voltage class range.

As an example, consider a 480 volt drive. This drive comes with factory default values for 480V, 60 Hz with motor data defaulted for U.S. motors (HP rated, 1750

RPM, etc.) By setting the [Voltage Class] parameter to “Low Voltage” (this represents 400V in this case) the defaults are changed to 400V, 50 Hz settings with motor data for European motors (kW rated, 1500 RPM, etc.).

Watts Loss


The following table lists watts loss data for PowerFlex 700S drives running at full load, full speed, and factory default PWM frequency of 4kHz.

Table 2.M 480V Watts Loss at Full Load/Speed, 4kHz

➊

Drive ND HP @

480V AC

0.5

1

2

3

5

7.5

10

15

20

25

30

Total Watt Loss

92

103

117

135

210

243

271

389

467

519

543

40

50

60

75

100

125

150

708

➋

➋

➋

➋

➋

➋

➊

Includes HIM

➋

Information not available at time of publication

2-154


Notes:

Numerics

20-COMM-C 2-13

20-COMM-D 2-21

20-COMM-R 2-90

A

Accel Time 2-1

Al x Filt Gain 2-2

Alarms 2-1

Analog Input Configuration 2-2

Analog Inputs 2-2

Anlg Inx Data 2-2

Anlg Inx Filt BW 2-2

Anlg Inx Offset 2-2

Anlg Inx Scale 2-2

Anlg Inx Volts 2-2

Anlg Out Real 2-3

Anlg Outx Integer 2-3

Anlg Outx Scale 2-4

Anlg Outx Zero 2-4

Applied LogicCmd 2-111

Atune Spd Ref 2-7

Atune Torq Ref 2-7

Auto Restart 2-4

Auto/Manual 2-4

Autotune

Direction Test 2-5

Feedback Configuration 2-5

Inertia Test 2-7

Motor Control 2-5

Motor Data 2-5

Motor Tests 2-6

Power Circuit Test 2-5

Start-Up Menu 2-5

Troubleshooting 2-7

Auxiliary Power Supply 2-7

B

Basic tuning with a gearbox or belt 2-125

Bus Regulation 2-7

C

Cable Trays and Conduit 2-11

Cable, Control 2-11

Cable, Motor Lengths 2-11

Cable, Power 2-11

Carrier (PWM) Frequency 2-11

CE

Conformity 2-36

Circuit Breakers 2-48

Common Bus Systems 2-12

Communication 2-12

Conduit

Cable Trays 2-11

Control Options 2-31, 2-111, 2-112

ControlNet 2-13

ControlLogix Programming 2-16

Datalinks Programming 2-17

Explicit Messaging 2-17

Setup Information 2-13

Technical Information 2-14

Copy Cat 2-18

Current Limit 2-19

D

Datalinks

Configuration 2-19

Decel Time 2-21

DeltaSpeedScale 2-59

Derating Guidelines 1-8

DeviceNet 2-21


DigIn 1 Sel 2-27



DigIn x Data 2-28

DigIn x Debounce 2-28

DigIn x User Data 2-28

Digital Inputs 2-26

Digital Outputs 2-29

Dimensions 1-11

Direction Control

Bipolar Reference 2-31

Distribution Systems 2-148, 2-149

Unbalanced 2-148

Ungrounded 2-148

DPI 2-31

Drive OL JnctTmp 2-35

Index

Index-2

Drive OL Status 2-35

Drive Overload 2-34

DriveLogix 2-33

Dynamic Braking 2-36

E

Efficiency 2-36

Electronic Gearing 2-36

EMC

Directive 2-36

EMC Directive 2-36

Encdr x Config 2-103

Encdr1 Position 2-80

Encoder x PPR 2-102

Exception Event1 2-111, 2-112

F

Faults 2-38

Fdbk LsCnfg Alt 2-111, 2-112

Fdbk LsCnfg Pri 2-111, 2-112

Field Oriented Control 2-6

Filters 2-38

Frame 1, 2, 3 Dimensions 1-12

Frame 5 Dimensions 1-14

Frame Bottom View Dimensions 1-17

Friction Compensation 2-47

Functions 2-149

Fuses 2-48

FVC Mode Config 2-112

FW Functions En 2-80

G

Grounding, General 2-57

H

Heat Dissipation 1-6

Heatsink Temp 2-35

HIM

Memory 2-57

Operations 2-57

HS OverTemp 2-35

HS Pending 2-35

Human Interface Module

User Display 2-57

I

Inertia Adaptation 2-58

Inertia Compensation 2-59

Inertia Torq Add 2-59

InertiaAccelGain 2-59

Input Devices 2-59

Input Modes 2-60

Input Power Conditioning 2-60

Input/Output Ratings 1-5

IT Foldback 2-35

IT Pending 2-35

IT Trip 2-35

J

Jnc Over Temp 2-35

Jog 2-60

L

Lead-Lag Filter 2-40

Links 2-60

Logic Command 2-59, 2-80, 2-110, 2-112

Low Pass Filter 2-38

Low Voltage Directive 2-36

M

Masks 2-62

Motor Control Mode 2-62

Motor Fdbk Sel 2-102

Motor Nameplate 2-62

Motor Overload 2-63

Motor Start/Stop 2-64

Mounting 2-64

Mounting Dimensions 2-64

Mtr Fdbk Alt Sel 2-102

Mtr Fdbk Sel Alt 2-111, 2-112, 2-113

Mtr Fdbk Sel Pri 2-111, 2-112, 2-113

N

Notch Filter 2-42

NTC Open 2-35

NTC Shorted 2-35

O

Output Devices

Drive Output Disconnection 2-64

Output Reactor 2-65

Output Display

Current 2-65

Frequency 2-65

Power 2-65

Voltage 2-65

Overcurrent 2-19

Overspeed Limit 2-66

Owners 2-66

P

Parameter Access Level 2-68

Parameters

Accel Time 2-1

Anlg In1 Data 2-3

Anlg In1 Offset 2-3

Anlg In1 Scale 2-3

Anlg In1 Volts 2-3

Anlg ln1 Data 2-3

Anlg ln1 Filt Gain 2-3

Anlg ln1 Offset 2-3

Anlg ln1 Scale 2-3

Anlg ln1Filt BW 2-3

Anlg Out1 Integer 2-4

Applied LogicCmd 2-111

Brake PulseWatts 2-9

Brake TP Data 2-11

Brake TP Sel 2-10

Bus Reg/Brake Ref 2-8

Bus/Brake Cnfg 2-8

Control Options 2-111, 2-112

Data In A1 Int 2-20

Data In A1 Real 2-20

Data Out A1 Int 2-20

Decel Time 2-21

Delayed Spd Ref 2-143

Dig Out 1 Bit 2-30

Dig Out 1 Data 2-30

DigIn 1 Bit 2-28

DigIn 1 Data 2-28


DigIn 1 User Data 2-28

Direction Mask 2-62

Direction Owner 2-66

Dlink OutDataTyp 2-94

Dlink OutDataType 2-16, 2-20

Index-3

DPI Ref Select 2-16, 2-22

Drive Logic Rslt 2-15, 2-21

Encdr1 Position 2-80

Exception Event1 2-111, 2-112

Fault Clr Owner 2-66

Fdbk LsCnfg Alt 2-111, 2-112

Fdbk LsCnfg Pri 2-111, 2-112

FVC Mode Config 2-112

FW Functions En 2-80

Jog Owner 2-66

Local I/O Status 2-29

Logic Command 2-80, 2-110, 2-112

Logic Status 2-15, 2-30

MC Diag Error 1 2-7



Motor Ctrl Mode 2-5

Motor NP FLA 2-62

Motor NP Hz 2-62

Motor NP Power 2-63

Motor NP Pwr Units 2-63

Motor NP RPM 2-1, 2-21, 2-62

Motor NP Volts 2-62

Motor Poles 2-63

Mtr Fdbk Sel Alt 2-111, 2-112, 2-113

Mtr Fdbk Sel Pri 2-111, 2-112, 2-113

Mtr TrqCurr Ref 2-4

Output Curr Disp 2-65

Output Current 2-20

Posit Detct1 In 2-80

PositDetct1 Stpt 2-80

Position Actual 2-80

Position Control 2-20, 2-80

Position Error 2-4

Position Status 2-20, 2-80

Rated Volts 2-9

Real to Int In 2-137

Real to Int Out 2-137

S Curve Spd Ref 2-137, 2-142

SL Dir Int Rx0 2-137

SL Dir Int Rx3 2-137

SL Dir Int Tx0 2-136, 2-137

SL Dir Int Tx3 2-136

SL Dir Real Rx0 2-137, 2-145

SL Dir Real Rx3 2-137

SL Dir Real Tx0 2-137

SL Dir Real Tx3 2-137

SL Mult A In 2-138

SL Mult B In 2-138

SL Mult Base 2-137

SL Mult Out 2-138

Index-4

SL Mult State 2-137, 2-138

SL Node Cnfg 2-136

SL Rx Comm Frmt 2-136

SL Rx DirectSel0 2-136

SL Rx DirectSel3 2-136

SL Tx DirectSel0 2-136

SL Tx DirectSel3 2-136

Spd Fdbk Scale 2-15

Spd Ref 1 2-3

Spd Ref Bypass 2-143, 2-145

Speed Ref 2 2-18, 2-22

Speed Ref Sel 2-16, 2-22

Start Owner 2-66

Stop Owner 2-66

TachSwitch Level 2-111, 2-112

Torque Ref 1 2-20

Tx Buf Data Type 2-138

Tx Dir Data Type 2-136

Permanent Magnet Control 2-6

Permanent Magnet Motors 2-68

PET 2-69

PI Loop 2-86

Posit Detct1 In 2-80

PositDetct1 Stpt 2-80

Position Actual 2-80

Position Control 2-80

Position Loop

Follower (Electronic Gearing) 2-70

In Position Detect 2-74

Point to Point 2-75

Registration 2-78

Position Loop - Position Watch 2-80

Position Status 2-80

Power Loss 2-81

Preset Speeds 2-86

Process PI Loop 2-86

Process PI Limits 2-87

Process PI Output 2-87

Process PI Reference and Feedback

2-87

Process PI Regulator 2-87

PWM Frequency 2-11

R

Reflected Wave 2-88

Remote I/O Adapter

ControlLogix System 2-90

Datalink Programming 2-94

Reference/Feedback Programming 2-93

RFI Filter Grounding 2-101

Ride Through 2-81

S

S Curve Spd Ref 2-59

S-Curve 2-101

Second Order Low Pass Filter 2-39

Specification

Heat Dissipation 1-6

Input/Output Ratings 1-5

Speed Comp 2-59

Speed Control 2-101

Speed Feedback 2-102

Speed Mode 2-101

Speed PI Regulator 2-119

Autotune Speed Reference 2-120

Current Limit Stop 2-121

Droop 2-124

Integral Gain 2-123

Proportional Gain 2-122

Servo Lock 2-121

Speed Error 2-121

Speed Reference Limits 2-120

Speed Regulation Anti-Backup 2-122

Speed Regulator Output Filter 2-124

Speed Regulator Output Limits 2-124

Speed Trim 2-119

Speed Ref Sel 2-28

Speed Reference 2-113

Accel/Decel Ramp and S-Curve 2-115

Direction Control and Bipolar Reference

2-115

Friction Compensation 2-117

Inertia Compensation 2-117

Jog Reference 2-115

Speed Limits 2-115

Speed Reference Bypass and Delayed

Speed Reference 2-116

Speed Reference Filter 2-118

Speed Reference Scale 2-118

Speed Reference Scaling 2-113

Speed Reference Select 2-114

Speed Trim1 2-118

Stop Command 2-115

Virtual Encoder 2-117

Speed Reference Select 2-118

Speed Regulation 2-101

Speed Trim 3 2-59

Speed/Position Feedback

Encoder 2-102

Feedback Device 2-102

Feedback Option Cards 2-106

Motor Position Feedback 2-109

Motor Simulator 2-105

Motor Speed Feedback and Scaled

Speed Feedback 2-109

Sensorless 2-105

SpeedTrim3 Scale 2-59

Start Inhibits 2-132

Start/Stop Modes

Configuring the Start and Stop for 2-Wire

Control 2-134

Configuring the Start and Stop for 3-Wire

Control 2-133

Start-Up 2-135

Stop Modes 2-135

Surrounding Air Derates 1-8

SynchLink

Buffered Data 2-138

Configuration 2-136

Direct Data 2-136

Master PowerFlex 700S Setup 2-142

Multiply Block 2-137

Slave PowerFlex 700S Setup 2-144

Speed Synchronization Example 2-141


V

Voltage Class 2-152

W

Watts Loss 2-153

www 1-1, 2-36

T

TachSwitch Level 2-111, 2-112

Test Points 2-147

Thermal Regulator 2-147

Torque Reference 2-147

Torque Select 2-128

Total Inertia 2-7

U

Unbalanced


Ungrounded


Ungrounded Distribution Systems 2-148

User Display, HIM 2-57

User Functions 2-149

Index-5

Index-6

www.rockwellautomation.com

Power, Control and Information Solutions Headquarters

Americas: Rockwell Automation, 1201 South Second Street, Milwaukee, WI 53204-2496 USA, Tel: (1) 414.382.2000, Fax: (1) 414.382.4444

Europe/Middle East/Africa: Rockwell Automation, Vorstlaan/Boulevard du Souverain 36, 1170 Brussels, Belgium, Tel: (32) 2 663 0600, Fax: (32) 2 663 0640

Asia Pacific: Rockwell Automation, Level 14, Core F, Cyberport 3, 100 Cyberport Road, Hong Kong, Tel: (852) 2887 4788, Fax: (852) 2508 1846

Publication PFLEX-RM002C-EN-

E – September 2005

Supersedes PFLEX-RM002B-EN-

E - August, 2003 Copyright © 2005 Rockwell Automation, Inc. All rights reserved. Printed in USA.

Allen-Bradley PowerFlex 700S Phase I Control AC Drive Reference Manual 190 Pages

Allen-Bradley PowerFlex 700S Phase I Control AC Drive Reference Manual

www.abpowerflex.com

Adjustable

Frequency AC Drive

Phase I Control

Reference Manual

Important User Information

Installation and Maintenance of Solid State Controls” (Publication SGI-1.1

http://www.ab.com/manuals/gi) describes some important differences

ATTENTION: Identifies information about practices or

Important: Identifies information that is especially important for successful

Shock Hazard labels may be located on or inside the drive to

Summary of Changes

Manual Updates

Notes:

Table of Contents

Summary of

Changes

Chapter 1

Chapter 2

Specifications & Dimensions

Detailed Drive Operation

Index

Chapter

Specifications & Dimensions

PowerFlex 700S

Specifications

Input/Output Ratings

Input Voltage Range/

Tolerance

Heat Dissipation

Example:

Mounting

Derating Guidelines

PowerFlex 700S Altitude and Efficiency

Dimensions

Notes:

Accel Time

Alarms

Chapter

Detailed Drive Operation

Configuration:

Application Example:

Analog Inputs

Analog Input Specifications

Analog Input Configuration

Analog Outputs

Analog Output Specifications

Analog Output Configuration

Auto/Manual

Autotune

Autotune - Start-Up Menu

Motor Control

Motor Data

Feedback Configuration

Power Circuit Test

Direction Test

Motor Tests

Auxiliary Power Supply

Inertia Test

Troubleshooting a “MC Commissn Fail” Fault during Autotune

Bus Regulation/Braking

Description

Technical Information

Bus Regulator/Braking Configuration

Cable, Control

Cable, Motor Lengths

Cable, Power

Cable Trays and Conduit

Carrier (PWM) Frequency

Common Bus Systems

Communications

ControlNet (20-COMM-C)

Setup Information

Technical Information

ControlLogix

Adapter

PowerFlex 700S

ControlLogix